HomeMy WebLinkAboutCRMS Current Specification 3.20.24 - originalB AR F ORK D INING H ALL
AND S TUDENT C ENTER
Renovations and Additions
SPECIFICATION PROJECT MANUAL
Construction Documents
February 14, 2024
242 N. 7th St. Carbondale, CO 81623
www.a4arc.com
PROSPEC® PROJECT MANUALS
www.prospec.biz
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 Summary
012100 Allowances
012300 Alternates
012500 Substitution Procedures
012600 Contract Modification Procedures
012900 Payment Procedures
013100 Project Management and Coordination
013200 Construction Progress Documentation
013233 Photographic Documentation
013300 Submittal Procedures
014000 Quality Requirements
015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls
016000 Product Requirements
017300 Execution
017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
017700 Closeout Procedures
017823 Operation and Maintenance Data
017839 Project Record Documents
017900 Demonstration and Training
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 Concrete: Refer to Structural Drawings
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
044200 Stone Masonry
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200 Structural Steel: Refer to Structural Drawings
055000 Metal Fabrications
055100 Metal Stairs
055213 Steel Railings
055700 Decorative Metal Screens
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000 Rough Carpentry: Refer to Structural Drawings
061600 Sheathing
061800 Glued-Laminated Wood Construction: Refer to Structural Drawings
062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry
062023 Interior Finish Carpentry
064113 Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets
064116 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets
064300 Wood Stairs and Railings
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071113 Bituminous Dampproofing
071416 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing
072100 Insulation
072500 Weather Barriers
072600 Vapor Retarders
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2
074113 Metal Roof Panels
074213 Metal Wall Panels
075423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing
076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
077200 Roof Accessories
078413 Penetration Firestopping
079200 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
081416 Flush Wood Doors
083113 Access Doors and Frames
084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
085200 Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows and Doors
086200 Unit Skylights
087100 Finish Hardware
088000 Glazing
089000 Louvers and Vents
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing
092900 Gypsum Board
093000 Tiling
095426 Linear Wood Ceilings
095450 Acoustic Wood Ceilings
096340 Stone Flooring and Slabs
096400 Composite Wood Flooring
096513 Resilient Base and Accessories
096519 Rubber Tile Flooring
097260 Tackable Wallcovering
098413 Wood Fiber Acoustic Panels
099113 Exterior Painting
099123 Interior Painting
099300 Staining and Transparent Finishing
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101423 Panel Signage
102800 Toilet and Bath Accessories
104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
104416 Fire Extinguishers
107313 Exterior Metal Trellis
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
113100 Residential Appliances
114010 Stainless Steel Casework
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122413 Roller Window Shades
123619 Wood Countertops
123661 Simulated Stone Countertops
124813 Entrance Floor Tiles
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
142400 Hydraulic Elevators
144600 Vertical Reciprocating Conveyor
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUMMARY 011000 - 1
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Type of the Contract.
3. Owner-furnished products.
4. Use of premises.
5. Owner's occupancy requirements.
6. Work restrictions.
7. Specification formats and conventions.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing
temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Bar Fork Dining Hall and Student Center
1. Project Location: 500 Holden Way, Carbondale, CO 81623.
B. Owner: Colorado Rocky Mountain School.
1. Address: 500 Holden Way, Carbondale, CO 81623
2. Phone: 970.963.2562
3. Web: www.crms.org
4. Contact: Joe White
5. Email: jwhite@crms.org
C. Owner Representative: Phil Vaughan Construction Management, Inc.
1. Address: 1038 County Road 323, Rifle, CO 81650
2. Contact: Phil Vaughan, President
3. Email: phil@pvcmi.com
D. Architect: A4 Architects LLC
1. Address: 242 North Seventh Street, Carbondale Colorado 81623
2. Phone: 970.963.6760
3. Web: www.a4arc.com
4. Contact: Olivia Emery, RA
5. Email: oemery@a4arc.com
6. Contact: Brad Zeigel, AIA
7. Email: bzeigel@a4arc.com
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUMMARY 011000 - 2
E. The Work consists of the following: Renovation and additions of an existing school to include addition to
second floor roof and interior alterations.
1. Occupancy Group: E
2. Construction Type: V-B
3. Fire Sprinklers: None
4. IBC Building Area: Existing Building 17,707 sf (Including residential basement, not including
gym.)
5. IBC Building Height 1 story.
6. IECC Climate Zone: 5 (Garfield County)
1.3 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a negotiated contract with the General Contractor as Construction
Manager.
1.4 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's
equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections.
1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor.
2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and
assist in Owner's inspection.
4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement.
5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties
to Contractor.
6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products.
Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates
of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect
noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at Project
site.
9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and
handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall
repair or replace them.
11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.
1.5 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project
site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUMMARY 011000 - 3
1. Limits:
a. Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet (12.2 m)
beyond building perimeter; 5 feet (1.5 m) beyond primary roadway curbs, walkways, and
main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet (7.6 m) beyond pervious paving areas.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear
and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place
and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such
occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial
occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the
Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and
required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. Upon execution of Certificate of
Substantial Completion, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems
serving occupied portions of building.
4. Upon execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner will assume responsibility for
maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during those hours and days of the week as
allowed by the prevailing regulatory agency.
1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division
format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing
in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the
sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of
contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in
the Contract Documents.
2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the
Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUMMARY 011000 - 4
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and
plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements
expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative
or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that
must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
B. Types of allowances include the following:
1. Lump-sum allowances.
2. Unit-cost allowances.
3. Quantity allowances.
4. Contingency allowances.
1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection
and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying
the Work.
B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include
recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for
Change Orders.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in
fulfillment of each allowance.
B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance
items that include installation as part of the allowance.
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate
installation.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALLOWANCES 012100 - 2
1.6 LUMP-SUM, UNIT-COST AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or
selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight and delivery to Project site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor,
installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner or
selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the
allowance.
C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for
credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change
Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the
contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs
include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related
costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change
Order.
1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the
difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-
place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing
wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs
and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to
unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity
survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in
the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor,
installation, overhead, and profit.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount
unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been
foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced
materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALLOWANCES 012100 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged
or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to
ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Door Hardware: Provide allowance for preparation of hardware schedule including access control.
B. Freezer: Provide allowance for on-site construction of freezer utilizing existing refrigeration compressor.
END OF SECTION 012100
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALTERNATES 012300 - 1
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates and list of alternates for
pricing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the
bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to
accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,
materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the
alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under
each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. TPO Roof Membrane per Section 075423:
1. Base: TPO Roof Membrane with nailbase as indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALTERNATES 012300 - 2
2. Deductive Alternate: Fully adhered TPO system without nailbase.
END OF SECTION 012300
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product
submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and
Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of
the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant
qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,
sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-
ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with
products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2
product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include
letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase
order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related
materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation
for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify
Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request,
or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's
Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with
related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests
recommended by manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change,
but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days
after commencement of the Work.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been
coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with
other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
C. In submitting a substitution, the Contractor makes the following representations:
1. Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior to
specified product.
2. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
3. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.
4. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay
progress schedule.
5. Cost data included on the substitution request is complete. Claims for additional costs related to
accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived.
6. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
7. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and
construction costs by the substitution.
8. Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be
complete in all respects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract
modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving
adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's
Supplemental Instructions."
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the
Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description
will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in
progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt
of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the
Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C,
"Proposal Worksheet Detail.”
B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change
on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of
purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,
including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change
requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal),"
with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "Proposal
Worksheet Detail."
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation
of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Contractor will issue a Change Order for
signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in
the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also
designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
changes to the Contract.
2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days
before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the
schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents.
Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the
Contract Sum.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored,
but not yet installed.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-
item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity.
Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total
cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-
place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as
general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and
final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between
Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the
period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 or document
provided by Owner and acceptable to Architect for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to
sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without
action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of
construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and
similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from
entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work
covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction
for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Sustainable design submittal for project materials cost data.
4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Sustainable design action plans.
6. Schedule of unit prices.
7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
10. Copies of building permits.
11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the
Work.
12. Initial progress report.
13. Report of preconstruction conference.
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work
claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement
showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for
Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including,
but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,
fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims”.
5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens”.
6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment”.
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of
Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for
corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project web site.
4. Project meetings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-
engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of
the Contract Documents.
B. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated below, acceptable
to Architect.
1. RFI documentation shall be delivered in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of
the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design.
Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to
ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and
operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation
of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility
for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for
coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is
required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual
Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability
necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials
fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and
resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural,
civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be
in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor
dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the
Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible
ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and
electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and
elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded
items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab
depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.
6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with
no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or
work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation
and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing
interpretation.
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable
to Architect.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven
working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time
for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum
may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract
Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log
weekly. Use Software log with not less than the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to
affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with
response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
G. RFI's shall be originated by the Contractor.
1. RFI's from subcontractors or material suppliers shall be submitted through, reviewed by, and
signed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect.
2. RFI's from subcontractors or material suppliers sent directly to the Owner’s Representative,
Architect or the Architect's consultants shall not be accepted and will be returned unanswered.
H. Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the requested information is not
available therein. RFI's which request information available in the Contract Documents will be returned
unanswered.
I. In cases where RFI's are issued to request clarification of coordination issues, for example, pipe and duct
routing, clearances, specific locations of work shown diagrammatically, and similar items, the Contractor
shall fully lay out a suggested solution using drawings or sketches drawn to scale, and submit same with
the RFI. RFI's which fail to include a suggested solution will be returned unanswered with a requirement
that the Contractor submit a complete request.
J. RFI's shall not be used for the following purposes:
1. To request approval of submittals
2. To request approval of substitutions,
3. To request changes which are known to entail additional cost or credit. (A Change Order Request
form shall be used.)
4. To request different methods of performing work than those drawn and specified.
K. In the event the Contractor believes that a clarification by the Architect results in additional cost or time,
Contractor shall not proceed with the work indicated by the RFI until a Change Order or Construction
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5
Change Directive is prepared and approved. RFI's shall not automatically justify a cost increase in the
work or a change in the project schedule.
1. Answered RFI's shall not be construed as approval to perform extra work.
2. Unanswered RFI's will be returned with a stamp or notation: Not Reviewed.
L. Architect will respond to RFI's on one of the following forms:
1. Answered RFI's:
a. Response directly upon Request for Information / Interpretation form.
b. Architect's Supplemental Instruction.
c. Request for Proposal.
2. Unanswered RFI's
a. Unanswered RFI's will be returned with a stamp or notation: Not Reviewed.
3. Answers to properly prepared RFI's may or may not be made directly upon the RFI form as
deemed appropriate by the Architect.
M. Architect may opt to retain RFI's for discussion during regularly scheduled project meetings for inclusion
of responses in meeting minutes in lieu of responding on a written form.
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of
date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and
Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the
Agreement.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and
its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude
matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Sustainable design requirements.
l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises and existing building.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction
activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by
the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have
preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Sustainable design requirements.
i. Review of mockups.
j. Possible conflicts.
k. Compatibility problems.
l. Time schedules.
m. Weather limitations.
n. Manufacturer's written instructions.
o. Warranty requirements.
p. Compatibility of materials.
q. Acceptability of substrates.
r. Temporary facilities and controls.
s. Space and access limitations.
t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
u. Testing and inspecting requirements.
v. Installation procedures.
w. Coordination with other work.
x. Required performance results.
y. Protection of adjacent work.
z. Protection of construction and personnel.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required
corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring
information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene
the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination,
or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items
of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of
Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Status of sustainable design documentation.
5) Deliveries.
6) Off-site fabrication.
7) Access.
8) Site utilization.
9) Temporary facilities and controls.
10) Progress cleaning.
11) Quality and work standards.
12) Status of correction of deficient items.
13) Field observations.
14) Status of RFIs.
15) Status of proposal requests.
16) Pending changes.
17) Status of Change Orders.
18) Pending claims and disputes.
19) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting
minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting
where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule
concurrently with the report of each meeting.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Construction schedule updating reports.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Site condition reports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and
controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and
resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early
start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where
activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can
be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly
owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones
and Contract completion date.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2. PDF electronic file.
B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show
logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire
construction period.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each
activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining
duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual
start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending
order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work
until most recent Application for Payment.
E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal
schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in
proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final
completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early
completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the
Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major
items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle
activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and
delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial
Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of
Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list
items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows
in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not
limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the
current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor
intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been
developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week
with a continuous vertical line.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the
Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton
diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis
diagram for the Work.
1. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress.
Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
2. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and
holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the
startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each
activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i. Testing.
j. Punch list and final completion.
k. Activities occurring following final completion.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion
dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network.
Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the
CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with
most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,
prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change
on the overall project schedule.
F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight
"early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Main events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information
concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events.
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the
Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing
the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual
construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to,
changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, testing and inspecting agencies,
and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1
SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Final Completion construction photographs or video.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for requirements for photographic documentation provided
under an allowance.
2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media and construction
videotapes as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.
4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of
equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for
location and direction of each video camera. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same
label information as corresponding set of photographs.
B. Construction Photographs: Submit each photographic view within seven days of taking photographs.
1. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of
prints on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images
that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including
access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce
clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF or JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 16.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly
show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic
location.
B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.
C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take color digital photographs of
Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from
different vantage points, as directed by Architect.
1. Mark areas of building to be demolished, and flag excavation areas and construction limits before
taking construction photographs.
2. Take as many photographs as required to fully document existing conditions at and adjacent to
property before starting the Work.
3. Take as many photographs as required of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to
accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.
D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs as required to fully document demolition,
excavation and construction progress to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for
Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were
taken.
E. Additional Photographs: Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic
photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in
the Contract Sum.
1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.
2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.
F. Provide photographs or video of all cavities prior to closing in with drywall or other finishes. Submit
with record documents of project.
END OF SECTION 013233
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements
for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports,
including Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration
of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's
responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require
Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and
delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to
submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those
corrections.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for
use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data
drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106,
Digital Data Licensing Agreement or other Agreement form acceptable to Owner and
Architect.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing
will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for
review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be
authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,
including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial
submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 calendar days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation
to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and
action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing
the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h. Category and type of submittal.
i. Submittal purpose and description.
j. Specification Section number and title.
k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
multiple items.
l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
n. Related physical samples submitted directly.
o. Indication of full or partial submittal.
p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
r. Other necessary identification.
s. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site or Architect's FTP
site specifically established for Project.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic
Project record document file.
3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
4. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity
responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer
or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of
product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not
suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in one of the following formats:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop
Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on
Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following
information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and
actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one
submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal
of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification
information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine
final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are
the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of
units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture,
or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line.
Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same
material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical
with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations
expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured
or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used
materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for
independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record
sample.
1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating
types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in
tabular form:
1. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project
Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900
"Payment Procedures.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and
Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by
manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing
experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
U. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements."
V. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for
compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
W. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of
product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7
X. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed
either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
Y. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if
applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and
systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written
request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and
sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract
Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work
of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.
Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout
Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's
approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return
them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp
appropriately to indicate action.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it
does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for
resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract
Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance
and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by
Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of
the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will
comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of
the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply
with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify
selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities
of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between
dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are
not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work
will be judged.
1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify
performance characteristics.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and
materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product
performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill,
factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the
Work and for completed Work.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall
mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain
construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements
specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being
familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most
stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity
or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of
requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent
report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.
Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,
if not, what corrective action was taken.
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,
judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards
and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;
individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity
to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly,
or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed
by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification
requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and
capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and
with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having
jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4
H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is
trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that
are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for
compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results
to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of
construction indicated for the completed Work.
d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse
products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and
similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and
inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates
from the Contract Documents.
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in
individual Specification Sections.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner
will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies
engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed
to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's
responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with
requirements, whether specified or not.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to
perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by
Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or
inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified
written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are
Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when
they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and
inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of
written reports.
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that
replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work
during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are
conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or
accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in
advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.
Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control
services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to
conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of
Owner, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and
reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect] and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to
Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration
into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract
Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection
facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the
Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities
without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project,
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction
personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction
General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary
utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a
construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel,
chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-
inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-
mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and
classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-
contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is
prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary
use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and
remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout
Procedures".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no
longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted,
if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system or private system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
1. If available, connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service
facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to
condition existing before initial use.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction
personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or
elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and
minimize energy consumption.
G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity,
and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
I. Telephone Service: Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for use when away from field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or
within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply
with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove
before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be
permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate
for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated
on Drawings.
1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required
to minimize dust.
C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4
D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. Existing parking areas may be used
with permission of Owner.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain
Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
a. If not indicated on Drawings, Provide 8 foot wide x 4 foot high project sign of exterior
grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted to Architect's design and colors.
b. List title of project, names of Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Contractor.
c. Erect on site at location established by Architect.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from
construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with
progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."
I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment"
and not temporary facilities.
J. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not allowed without Owner’s permission.
K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not
adequate.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other
improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered.
Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as
required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is more stringent.
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees
to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage,
flooding, and erosion.
F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a
manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to
accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.
G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar
violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.
H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide
temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary
enclosures.
K. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to
separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-
retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.
L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to
protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire
prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of
fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project
site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct
personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign
stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size
with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of
mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to
wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous
and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and
conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient
mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic
content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material.
4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing
the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure
but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within
48 hours.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit
availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and
similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection
facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it
has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner
reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project;
product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special
warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"
and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is
current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility.
Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to
have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is
named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or
other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation
for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify
Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of
receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever
is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product
request within time allocated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use
on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected
products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and
loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to
determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure
above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation
and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,
and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do
not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular
product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights
for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready
for execution.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly
executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written
document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a
complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish
salient characteristics of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named
product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's
convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a
product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable
products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
3. Products:
a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product,
that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide
a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer,
that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on
Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a
comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications
indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed
product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a
product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final
on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified
requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal
of product.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect
will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both
standard and premium items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when
the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is
consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is
compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXECUTION 017300 - 1
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record
Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final
cleaning.
3. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location
and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous
materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer.
D. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the
kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations
and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXECUTION 017300 - 2
support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of
cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in
Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that
has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will
provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place
materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence
and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving
Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,
examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be
installed.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXECUTION 017300 - 3
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the
Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on
Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100
"Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify
Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying
practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work.
Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers
from two or more locations.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXECUTION 017300 - 4
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.
Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each
survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by
Architect and Construction Manager.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points
before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during
construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for
type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring
field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations of construction and sitework.
D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to prepare a final property survey
showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by
land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are
accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease
of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in
excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on
site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXECUTION 017300 - 5
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and
number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of
the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load
conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time
for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange
joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with
cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other
construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting
and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are
required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to
minimize interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining
construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original
Installer's written recommendations.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXECUTION 017300 - 6
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and
chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of
adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core
drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by
cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.
Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture
or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where
applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and
refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils,
putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
J. Payment for Costs: Cost caused by ill-timed or defective Work or Work not conforming to Contract
Documents, including costs for additional services of Architect and Engineer to be paid by Contractor.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.
Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXECUTION 017300 - 7
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended.
If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to
health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom
from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers
or into waterways.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without
binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements"
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017300
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
B. See Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from
construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective
demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or
deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for
reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the
Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
B. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
C. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by
recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
D. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and
incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling
waste materials shall accrue to Owner.
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable
waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are
removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container
and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.
For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for
recycling wood.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate
on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 017419
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other
Sections.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected
(Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is
incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to
requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are
incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting
Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy
permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record
documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic
documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record
information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare
parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label
with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.
7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to
requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are
incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel
of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900
"Demonstration and Training."
6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10
days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor
of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3
1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete
the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion
inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect.
Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that
must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction
operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by
Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from
lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay
in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond
submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each
item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the
surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or
that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or
unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of
exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according
to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or
broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care
not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove
excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting
from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial
Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,
refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating
equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove
and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged
transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace
finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical
and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or
reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy
starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance
manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification
Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and
organized as required by this Section.
1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field
conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on
digital media acceptable to Architect.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item
name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial
Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return
copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each
corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing
demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and
materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2
B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system
and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual
shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
C. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems
contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the
content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,
subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components
of one system into a single binder.
F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file
for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning
of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names.
Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual
directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual
composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the
system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic
manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions
and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar
codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer,
supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual
Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment
indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source
information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties
and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to
match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer
or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and
service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty
and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified
by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address,
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5
and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the
following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and
component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance
procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required
lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with
standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts
identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of
maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone
number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions
that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by
emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data
indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets
pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component
incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6
using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and
delete references to information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of
component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.
Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of
completed installation.
F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the
following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual
requirements.
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints and one PDF electronic
file of scanned record prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one annotated PDF electronic file of Project's
Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one annotated PDF electronic file and directories of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings,
incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or
entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of
corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to
identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel
proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and
similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion,
review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital
data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,
redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in
recording information.
C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets.
Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification.
Include identification in each digital data file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from
that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a
record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies
substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's
written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy or scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous
records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy or
scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record
document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait
until end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office
apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition,
protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's
reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including
the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a
list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and
instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training
module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training
video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live
instructional module.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each
training module.
1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic
file format on compact disc.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance
personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose
work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and
training.
C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to
demonstration and training.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize
disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and
approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each
system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module,
include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 3
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module.
Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 4
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to
coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants,
instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,
subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements,
criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and
maintenance data submittals.
E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of
module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format
acceptable to Architect.
END OF SECTION 017900
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1
SECTION 024119 – SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. See Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for disposal of demolished
materials.
C. See Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for use of premises and Owner-occupancy requirements.
2. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before
selective demolition operations.
3. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and
environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
4. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures.
5. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for disposal of demolished
materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated
to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for
reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall
them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise
indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain
Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become Contractor’s property and shall be removed form
Project site.
B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, items of interest or value to that
may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner’s property. Carefully remove and salvage
each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and
removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of
elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
B. Pre-demolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective
demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.
C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to
accept hazardous wastes.
1. Comply with submittal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management
and Disposal."
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in
material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to
selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by
selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct
selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with
selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and
Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equal or surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and
salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a
written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent
structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or
videotapes.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4
G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services
and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with
selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition
and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used
facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary
Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to
preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain,
and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and
as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and
as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective
demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next
lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools
or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces,
such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting
flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-
cutting operations.
5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to
match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make
item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected
storage location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] and reinstalled in their original locations after
selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using
power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A. Extent of selective demolition determined by Architect. Refer to Demolition drawings and keynotes.
END OF SECTION 024119
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE CLADDING 044200 - 1
SECTION 044200 – STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of stone:
1. Reclaimed sandstone anchored and adhered to substrates at interior feature walls.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions contained in ASTM C 119 apply to this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242.
B. Structural Performance: Provide stone attachment system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and racking characteristics.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each fastener type and grout.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing stone cladding systems similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Stone: Reclaimed stone from demolished fireplace.
C. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory, sealant, and other material
from a single manufacturer for each product.
D. Mock-up: Prepare 3’ x 3’ mock-up for Architect’s approval. Mock up may be constructed in feature wall
location and left in place if approved.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE CLADDING 044200 - 2
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.
1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
2. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute
weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop
Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side
up when units are installed.
C. Deliver sealants to Project site in original unopened containers labeled with manufacturer's name, product
name and designation, color, expiration period, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
D. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.
E. Store aggregates in locations where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
where contamination can be avoided.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect stone cladding during erection as follows:
1. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources. Immediately remove
such materials without damaging stone.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar and sealant droppings.
B. Environmental Limitations for Sealants: Do not install sealants when ambient and substrate temperatures
are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (5 deg C) or when joint substrates
are wet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE
A. Reclaimed stone from demolished fireplace.
1. Application: Match existing.
2. Grout: match existing.
B. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.
C. Application: Anchored.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE CLADDING 044200 - 3
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with sandstone shall contain not more than 0.60
percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or
Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 1/4 inch and pointing mortar, use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.
1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other durable stone; of
color necessary to produce required mortar color.
E. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion,
serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive
manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
F. Water: Potable.
2.3 VENEER ANCHORS
A. Materials:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2.
B. Fabricate anchors from hot-dip galvanized steel, ASTM A 36/A 36M for materials and
ASTM A 123/A 123M for galvanizing., temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding
allowable design stresses. Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from hot-dip galvanized steel,
ASTM A 36/A 36M for materials and ASTM A 123/A 123M for galvanizing.
C. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal anchor
section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of
wall.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A 700-708.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10, DW-10HS or DW-10-X.
d. Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III or RJ-711.
2. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf (445-N) load in both
tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
3. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened
strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE CLADDING 044200 - 4
4. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.097-inch- (2.5-mm-)
thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication or 0.078-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet.
5. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch- (6.4-mm-)
diameter, hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel wire.
2.4 STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50
to 70, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of
depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.
B. Concealed Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel in thicknesses
indicated, but not less than 0.0156 inch (0.4 mm) thick. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
C. Cementitious Dampproofing: Provide cementitious formulations that are recommended by ILI and that
are nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to anchors and attachments.
D. Asphalt Dampproofing: Cut-back asphalt complying with ASTM D 4479, Type I or asphalt emulsion
complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or IV.
E. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m), self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with
ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
F. Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933, fabricated into 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) mesh with minimum
0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel wire.
G. Sealants for Joints in Stone Cladding: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants
of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and do not stain stone.
1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
H. Sealant for Filling Kerfs: Same sealant used for joints in stone.
1. Single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing, medium to high modulus, silicone sealant; Class 25,
Use NT (nontraffic), and Use M (masonry).
2.5 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated,
including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
B. Control depth of stone and back check to maintain minimum clearance of 2 inches between backs of
stone units and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing (if any), backup walls, and
other work behind stone.
C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds
to fit supports.
D. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting devices as indicated
or needed to set stone securely in place.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE CLADDING 044200 - 5
E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match
approved samples and mockups.
F. Cut stone to produce uniform joints matching existing fireplace.
G. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as required to
accommodate contiguous work.
H. Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles, and stone dust.
2.6 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before
adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that
will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one
to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency.
Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S.
2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N.
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and
latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a consistency
similar to that of thick cream.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part or all of
water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose damp sand,
and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and
grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer
and stone producer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. Dominion Restoration Products.
c. EaCo Chem, Inc.
d. Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
e. Prosoco, Inc.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE CLADDING 044200 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive stone cladding and conditions under which stone cladding will be installed,
with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of stone cladding.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLING BACKUP STRUCTURE
A. Installing Steel Trusses, Strongback Frames and Miscellaneous Steel Framing: Comply with AISC 303
and install to accommodate construction tolerances specified.
1. Maintain erection of backup structure within tolerances in AISC 303.
2. For prefabricated units to which stone has been installed before erection, maintain tolerances of
stone faces and edges as specified in "Installation Tolerances" Article.
B. Installing Steel Stud Frames: Install to comply with requirements in Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal
Framing."
1. Install steel stud frames level, plumb, and true to line with no variation in plane or alignment
exceeding 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and no variation in position exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2. For prefabricated frames to which stone has been installed before erection, maintain tolerances of
stone faces and edges as specified in "Installation Tolerances" Article.
3.3 SETTING STONE CLADDING, GENERAL
A. Before setting stone clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials.
Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only
mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
B. Execute stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at Project site to
do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges
eased slightly to prevent snipping.
C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work.
D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Install anchors,
supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone cladding in place. Shim
and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated with uniform
joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and
indicated tolerances.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE CLADDING 044200 - 7
3.4 SETTING MECHANICALLY ANCHORED STONE CLADDING
A. Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in
ASTM C 1242.
3.5 SETTING STONE CLADDING WITH MORTAR
A. Coat backs of stone units and face of scratch coat with cement-paste bond coat, then butter both surfaces
with setting mortar. Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess will be forced out the edges of stone
units as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and scratch coat.
B. Set stone in full bed of mortar with head joints filled, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective joints, and stone
cladding that does not match approved samples and mockups. Damaged stone may be repaired if
Architect approves methods and results.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stone cladding's matching approved samples and mockups, complying
with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone cladding as work progresses. Remove excess sealant and smears as
sealant is installed.
D. Final Cleaning: Clean stone cladding no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing,
using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents,
cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could
damage stone.
END OF SECTION 044200
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel framing and supports.
2. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.
4. Miscellaneous steel trim.
5. Metal ladders.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Paint products.
2. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal
fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For
metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M
or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm).
2. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B,
0.079-inch (2-mm) nominal thickness.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-
plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide
stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is
indicated to be galvanized.
D. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
G. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
J. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four
times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized
per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
K. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts complying
with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with
SSPC-Paint 20.
D. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107,
specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior
and exterior applications.
H. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined
pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where
possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts,
unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices
to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm)
embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of
units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5
2.6 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction.
Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.
2.7 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete
construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded
steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or
bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
B. Aluminum Ladders:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. O'Keeffe's Inc.
b. Precision Ladders, LLC.
c. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc.
d. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.
2. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)
deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.
C. Finish:
1. Shop-Primed Steel Finish: Prepare to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning" and apply zinc-rich primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1.
2. Factory apply two top coats, per Section 099113. Apply one touch up coat after installation.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices
where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other
work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6
2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure
conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE
No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
2.12 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm
or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
D. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying
and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Locations: Awnings and canopies per Section 107313.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut,
or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
5. All galvanized parts are not to be welded in the field.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications
are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry,
or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including
manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with
anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry,
install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond
to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been
positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off
flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to
moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.
Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-
PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1
SECTION 055100 - METAL GRATING STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Industrial-type stairs with steel-grating treads and risers.
2. Metal plank gratings.
3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
B. Location: Loading dock.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings not installed in metal stairs.
2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to metal
stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:
1. Metal grating treads and risers.
2. Paint products.
3. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 2
B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal
Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.
2. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required
stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For
components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M
or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
D. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or
ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.
E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
F. Iron Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 3
H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.
I. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 33, unless another grade is required by design loads.
2.3 METAL GRATINGS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: McNICHOLS.
1. Treads: Perf-O-Grip stair treads, 12" X 36" (6) treads.
2. Planks: Perf-O-Grip plank grating, 12" X 72" and 12" X 120".
3. Finish: Galvanized steel.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for
exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts as indicated.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with
ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with
SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 4
D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior
and exterior applications.
E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches--W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets,
bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting
structure.
1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
E. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where
possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts
unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where
water may accumulate.
2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels plates or channels tubes.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 5
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers.
2. Construct platforms of steel channel plate or channel tube headers and miscellaneous framing
members as needed to comply with performance requirements.
3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using
bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.
B. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating;
fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."
1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded or pressure-locked steel grating with openings in
gratings no more than 3/4 inch in least dimension.
2. Surface: Plain.
3. Finish: Galvanized.
4. Fabricate grating treads with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections.
Secure treads to stringers with bolts.
2.8 STEEL TUBE RAILINGS
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish,
and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that
needed to withstand indicated loads.
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to
provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at
fittings.
C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
2. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
3. By radius bends of radius indicated[ or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius
indicated.
4. By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.
D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each
repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without
buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns
unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and
other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.
1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-
metal components.
3. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and
sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 6
H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to
transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish
thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of
substrate.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Factory-finish metal railings and stairs prior to assembly. Touch-up in field.
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize exterior items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
3. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep
holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3,
"Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes
and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
"Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop
painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry
inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs.
Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and
free of rack.
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry,
or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut,
or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 7
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance
of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width.
H. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed
anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond
to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.
B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and
aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge
of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs.
Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and
free of rack.
B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints.
D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
3.4 INSTALLING STEEL TUBE RAILINGS
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at
spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure
posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and
anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 8
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face
of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required
to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
2. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
3. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag
bolts.
4. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
5. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate
with carpentry work to locate backing members.
6. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
7. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed
steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055100
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STEEL RAILINGS 055213 - 1
SECTION 055213 - STEEL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Pipe and tube railings for exterior locations.
2. Fabricated steel infill panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For mechanically connected railings, grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish required.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported
rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another
grade and weight are required by structural loads.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STEEL RAILINGS 055213 - 2
1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for
electrodeposited zinc coating.
B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488.
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
E. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.
F. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with
ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for
exterior use.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than
that required to support structural loads.
B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for
this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
C. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
D. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
E. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member
throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings or welded steel plates. Grind
welds smooth.
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying
and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STEEL RAILINGS 055213 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels
and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after
fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further
cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake
of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space.
D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.
E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.
F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used.
H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag
bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 055213
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DECORATIVE METAL SCREENS 055700 - 1
SECTION 055700 – DECORATIVE METAL SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Welded wire grid panels for exterior application as plant screens.
2. Channel and angle trim.
3. Panel posts.
4. Accessory clips, straps and spacers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog details for specified products demonstrating
compliance with referenced standards. Provide list of fittings being provided with descriptions and
either photographs or drawings for each type.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and installation. Include the following:
1. Plans, elevations, and detail sections showing sizes, critical dimensions, panel layout
constraints using a 2 x 2 inch modular grid, and details and locations of accessories.
2. Indicate materials, methods, finishes, fittings, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C. Verification Samples: Two samples representing actual products and finishes as follows:
1. Welded wire grid panel, 6 in. x 6 in., with one edge of channel trim and one edge of angle trim,
all as one unit.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years’ experience in manufacturing and supplying welded wire panel
systems of the type required for this Project.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials from damage. Store panels flat. Provide edge protection when strapping is used. Do
not apply loads to panel edges.
B. Inspect products upon delivery in order to submit timely freight claim for any damaged materials.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DECORATIVE METAL SCREENS 055700 - 2
C. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.
D. Handle and store products according to manufacturer's recommendations. Leave products wrapped or
otherwise protected and under clean and dry storage conditions until required for installation.
E. Exercise care not to scratch, mark, dent, or bend metal components during delivery, storage, and
installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify actual openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on
shop drawings.
B. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
construction delays.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS
A. Panels shall be rigid, three dimensional welded wire grid fabricated of 14 gage galvanized steel wire.
1. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: Welded-wire, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A641.
B. Face Grid: Wires shall be welded at each intersection to form a 2 x 2 inch face grid on the front and
back of panels,
C. Length and Width: As indicated on the Drawings.
D. Tolerance: 1/8 inch in width and 1/8 inch in length.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim:
1. Fabricate from 20-gage ASTM A879 galvanized steel.
2. Types:
a. Channel Trim: Thickness of panel x ½ inch legs.
b. Angle Trim: ½ inch x ½ inch legs.
3. Locations:
a. As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Clips and Straps: Provide manufacturer’s standard types of clips and straps suitable for mounting
conditions. Fabricate from ASTM A879 galvanized steel. Adjustable clips shall have ¼ inch diameter
18-8 stainless steel bolt, washer, and nut.
C. Plastic Spacers: Provide ½ inch thick black Ultra High Molecular Weight polyethylene
(UHMW) washers to hold clips away from mounting surface.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DECORATIVE METAL SCREENS 055700 - 3
D. Fasteners for Attachment to Structure Pull Out Value: 480 lbs.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Cut to size.
B. Weld trim to panels and grind smooth exterior surfaces of welds.
2.4 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize products made from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings,
plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron hardware indicated to be galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Finish and Color: Galvanized finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site
clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify alignment, support dimensions, and tolerances are correct.
B. Inventory components to ensure all required items are available for installation. Inspect components
for damage. Remove damaged components from site and replace.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Spans: For freestanding fences and screens, span between structural supports should not exceed 8’ for
3” thick panels without thorough review of specific site conditions and mounting details. For overhead
horizontal or inclined panels span between structural supports should not exceed 4’. All curved panel
spans should be reviewed based on specific panel radius and center to center of proposed structural
support spacing.
B. Install panels plumb and square, centered within area designated for panels, and aligned to maintain
modular grid.
C. Avoid cutting panels in field. Where field cutting is essential, clean and dry area and apply touch-up
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DECORATIVE METAL SCREENS 055700 - 4
paint to cut edges.
D. Install securely with fasteners located to meet manufacturer’s requirements.
E. Repair bent or damaged panels. If panels cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Owner, remove from
jobsite and replace with new panels.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install welded wire panel plant support system by setting posts as indicated on the Drawings and
fastening panels to posts according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Clean installed products
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before Owner's acceptance.
B. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
C. Remove from project site and legally dispose of construction debris associated with this work.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of Project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
C. Protect installed products and finished surfaces from damage during construction.
D. Replace defective or damaged components as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION 055700
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEATHING 061600 - 1
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Subflooring.
4. Underlayment.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"
or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not
in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and
Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEATHING 061600 - 2
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements
in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response
characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a
qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less
when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when
the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet
(3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-
retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering
according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested
according to ASTM D 3201/D 3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is
not indicated.
3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to
ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. For roof
sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for
temperatures up to 170 deg F (76 deg C) shall be not less than span ratings specified.
C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing
agency.
E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.
2.4 WALL SHEATHING
A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick or as noted on drawings.
B. Plywood Sheathing: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
C. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
1. Basis of Design: Huber Engineered Woods.
2.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEATHING 061600 - 3
2.6 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I, Underlayment
single-floor panels.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 single-floor panels.
1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick or as noted on drawings.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
Article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
2.8 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C 834, and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers.
B. Fluid-Applied Flashing: ZIP System Liquid Flash.
C. Tape Flashing: ZIP System Flashing Tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with
minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's "Uniform Building Code."
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEATHING 061600 - 4
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate
members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight
connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these
materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through
completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural
support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not
exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood
Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of
wall sheathing panels.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
3. Underlayment:
a. Nail to subflooring.
b. Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends.
c. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring right before installing
flooring.
3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws.
2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural
elements.
3.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT
A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEATHING 061600 - 5
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. Apply liquid or tape flashing to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating
sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.
3.5 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm), except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.
END OF SECTION 061600
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR WOOD SIDING 062013 - 1
SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR WOOD SIDING
PART 5 - GENERAL
5.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
5.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior wood siding on exterior sheathing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry
work not exposed to view.
2. Section 072500 Sheathing for rainscreen and sheathing components.
5.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
5.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials,
dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of siding indicated.
5.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Labeling: Provide composite siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding, including related accessories,
from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR WOOD SIDING 062013 - 2
5.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and
other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation
within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
5.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to
rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 6 - PRODUCTS
6.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of
Review.
B. Maximum Moisture Content: 14 percent.
6.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Water-Repellent Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: AWPA N1 (dip, spray, flood, or
vacuum-pressure treatment).
1. Species and Grade: Architect select.
2. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do
not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material.
3. Application: Exterior trim and wood siding.
6.3 EXTERIOR WOOD SIDING
A. Lumber Siding for Semitransparent-Stained Finish.
1. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20 and treated for weather and UV
resistance.
2. Species and Grade: Western Redwood.
3. Installation: match existing.
4. Sealed and stained finish selected by Architect.
5. Maximum Moisture Content: 12 percent.
6. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
7. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
8. Thickness: ¾”
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR WOOD SIDING 062013 - 3
6.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Semitransparent-Stained Finish:
1. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20 and treated for weather and UV
resistance.
2. Species and Grade: Match siding.
3. Maximum Moisture Content: 12 percent.
4. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
5. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
6.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate.
1. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face fastening is
required.
B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
2. Coating: G60 (Z180)
3. Depth: per drawings.
C. Wood Glue: Waterproof resorcinol glue recommended by manufacturer for exterior carpentry use.
D. Backer rod and caulk for 3/8” gap between siding and adjacent materials.
E. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, window head flashing, corner cap, and other items
as recommended by manufacturer for building configuration; match type of siding.
F. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for
flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry.
1. Horizontal Joint Flashing for Panel Siding: Preformed, prefinished aluminum, Z-shaped flashing.
G. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of
substrates for intended application.
H. Rainscreen: refer to Section 072500.
6.6 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm), except members with
ends exposed in finished work.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and
edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR WOOD SIDING 062013 - 4
PART 7 - EXECUTION
7.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
7.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or
too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
7.3 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Do not install damaged components.
B. Install siding to furring over rainscreen, insulation and weather resistant barrier at locations indicated on
Drawings and as recommended by rainscreen manufacturer.
1. Install furring horizontally to studs over board insulation.
2. Install vertical siding to furring.
3. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
C. Install trim and accessories recommended by manufacturer for a full and complete installation.
D. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight
installation.
E. Back-brush and seal all end cuts of siding.
7.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of
lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR WOOD SIDING 062013 - 5
1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
7.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish
carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
7.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
7.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy
surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062013
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1
SECTION 062023 – INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior trim for painted finish.
2. Redwood paneling.
3. Wood ceilings.
4. Melamine slat wall.
5. Shelving and built-in cubbies.
6. Shop finishing of woodwork.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for wood species, finishes and locations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural
woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
B. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, at-
tachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking
and reinforcing specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and
other items installed in architectural woodwork.
4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and an identification number
indicated for each leaf. Identification number shall indicate the flitch and the sequence within the
flitch for each leaf.
C. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished
woodwork.
2. Wood-veneer-faced board products, with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each spe-
cies and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish one-half of face as specified.
3. Step finish materials on sample to show and clearly define each coat.
4. Provide separate samples of unfaced board product used for core.
5. Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced board products, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pat-
tern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced board product used for core.
6. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indi-
cated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient pro-
duction capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 2
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality
to those required for this Project.
C. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and
relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual di-
mensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support wood-
work by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop
drawings.
2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and
proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming
at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed di-
mensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of
woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork,
with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated:
1. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
2. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Designer select.
C. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.
D. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1.
E. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 3
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1 for
applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer.
C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for appli-
cable requirements.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Pro-
vide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and
elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for
drilled-in-place anchors.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard
and of the following grade:
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture
content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
following:
1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members and rails: 1/16 inch.
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Pro-
ject site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and in-
stallation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fit-
ting.
E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in dia-
grams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.
2.4 INTERIOR WOOD PANELING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable AWI Section for wood wall boards.
1. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and characteristics.
2. Species: Redwood (reuse existing or install new).
3. Lap Edge:
a. Square shiplap.
b. Nickel Gap shiplap.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 4
4. Thickness: ½”.
5. Finish: Smooth sanded (S4S).
6. Size: per Drawings.
7. Moisture Content: 12%.
8. Stain: Transparent, per Section 099300.
9. Board-Matching Method: Select and arrange slats for similarity of grain pattern and color.
10. Attachment: Finish nails.
2.5 INTERIOR ACOUSTICAL WOOD PLANKS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable AWI Section for wood wall boards.
11. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and characteristics.
12. Species: Douglas Fir.
13. Edge: Square.
14. Thickness: ½”.
15. Finish: Smooth sanded (S4S).
16. Size: per Drawings.
17. Moisture Content: 12%.
18. Stain: Transparent, per Section 099300.
19. Attachment: Finish nails.
3.2 INTERIOR LAMINATED SLAT WALL
B. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable AWI Section for wood wall boards.
1. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and characteristics.
2. Fabricator: LP Melamine.
3. Wood: Medium density fiberboard (MDF).
4. Finish: Melamine, Architect select from manufacturer full range.
5. Size: per Drawings.
6. Moisture Content: 12%.
7. Attachment: Finish nails.
2.6 WOOD CEILINGS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable AWI Section for wood wall boards.
8. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and characteristics.
9. Species: Cedar.
10. Grade: Standard.
11. Thickness: ½ inch.
12. Finish: Rough sawn (RS).
13. Size: per Drawings.
14. Moisture Content: 12%.
15. Edge: Tongue and groove.
16. Stain: Transparent, per Section 099300.
17. Board-Matching Method: Select and arrange slats for similarity of grain pattern and color.
18. Attachment: Finish nails.
2.7 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
19. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and characteristics.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 5
20. Grade: Custom.
21. Species: Poplar.
22. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent.
23. Painted: per Section 099123.
24. Finish: Smooth sanded.
A. Finger jointed lumber not permitted. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of
other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
3.3 SHELVING AND CUBBIES
A. Shelving and Cubbies: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. Do not use
particleboard or MDF that contains urea formaldehyde.
1. Particleboard with radiused and filled front edge.
2. MDF with radiused front edge.
3. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-5-1/2-inch boards with hole and notch to receive clothes rods, as specified above for
shelving.
C. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime-painted formed steel.
3.4 SHOP FINISHING
A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until
after installation.
B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of
woodwork. Apply two coats to back of boarding.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish System: Interior transparent per Section 099300.
3. Staining: Architect select.
4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain
wood before staining and finishing.
5. Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
6. Sheen/Gloss: Architect select for each material, provide submittals.
D. Paint: per Section 099123.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.5 PREPARATION
A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 6
3.6 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install
adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset.
4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent treads and risers
and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between largest and smallest treads and risers
within each flight.
3.7 PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in random-width
pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width.
1. Install in full lengths without end joints.
2. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall.
3. Install with uniform end joints with only end-matched (tongue-and-groove) joints within each
field of paneling.
4. Install with uniform end joints. Locate end joints only over furring or blocking.
5. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and
color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards.
6. Fasten paneling by face nailing, setting nails, and filling over nail heads.
7. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues.
3.8 CEILING INSTALLATION
A. Select and arrange boards to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent
boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards.
1. Attach boards to supports with manufacturer's recommended board adhesive and fasteners. Space
fasteners as needed for tight fit.
2. Install with uniform end joints with only end-matched (tongue-and-groove) joints
3. Install with uniform end joints. Locate end joints only over furring or blocking.
4. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues or finish nails.
3.9 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of
lumber available. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints. Use scarf joints for
end-to-end joints.
3.10 SHELVING/CUBBY INSTALLATION
A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and sand exposed
ends smooth.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 7
B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and
filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches
(900 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall
anchors.
D. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and reinstalled.
Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.
END OF SECTION 062023
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 1
SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Architectural wood cabinets.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood cabinets unless
concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet
hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished
cabinets.
3. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and color,
with exposed surface finished.
4. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
5. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or
WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or Licensee of
WI's Certified Compliance Program.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI or WI certification program indicating that woodwork
complies with requirements of grades specified.
2.2 WOOD CASEWORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Custom.
B. Type of Construction: Combi Core plywood.
C. Wood for Exposed Surfaces: Plywood veneer selected by Designer.
1. Finish: Stain color selected by Designer.
D. Semiexposed Surfaces: Hardwood plywood with melamine finish.
E. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless
located directly under tops.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except
for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-
closing.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 3
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
G. Countertop and Shelf Brackets: Refer to Finish Schedule.
H. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
I. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.
J. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
K. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
L. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18
for BHMA finish number indicated.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip
galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in GANA's
"Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2.7 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only
final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064113 - 4
B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets,
as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed
surfaces of cabinets.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish.
3. Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane.
4. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
5. Sheen: Designer select.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and
plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing screws] for
exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned.
Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c.
with screws able to penetrate framing by 1.5 inches or toggle-bolts.
F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into
underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with
matching filler where exposed.
END OF SECTION 064113
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1
SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets and shelving.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural
cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.
B. Refer to Interior Finish Schedule for product selections.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product and cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by
woodwork quality standard.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 2
1. Manufacturers: see drawings for list of products.
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction: As indicated.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGS.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.
H. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed
laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except
for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening.
C. Pulls: as indicated on drawings or if not indicated provide 6” ladder style pulls in satin chrome finish.
D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3
1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension type; zinc-plated-
steel ball-bearing slides.
G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for
BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip
galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before
shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately
sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and
plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 4
D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned.
Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.
Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400
mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into
wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal
backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
END OF SECTION 064116
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 1
SECTION 064300 - WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood stairs and railings, including rough carriages for stairs.
2. Recycled timber treads.
3. Shop finishing of wood stairs and railings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
B. Samples: Shop-applied finishes.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs and railings until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
B. Grade: Standard.
C. Wood for Opaque Finish: MDF for treads and risers to receive resilient covers.
D. Finishes for Stair Parts: Opaque finish for resilient covers except railings for transparent finish.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 2
2.2 WOOD TIMBER STAIRS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Wood for Transparent Finish: Reclaimed timber beams.
D. Traction Strip:
1. Basis of Design: Balso Non Slip Abrasive Bar: ANB-3
2. Color: Black
3. Routed installation.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber or fire-retardant-treated
softwood lumber where required, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Laminated veneer lumber, made with an exterior-type adhesive complying
with ASTM D 2559, and with the following allowable design values as determined according to
ASTM D 5456:
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip
galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood stairs and railings to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
1. Corners of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch radius unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
C. Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to
carriages.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS 064300 - 3
1. Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position and
no more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) out of relative position for adjacent treads and risers.
2.6 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish wood stairs and railings at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as
applicable to each unit of work.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom
2. Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-
grain wood before staining and finishing.
4. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
5. Sheen: Satin.
D. Opaque Finish: none for treads to receive resilient covers.
1. Grade: Economy.
2. Finish: System - 4, water-based latex acrylic.
3. Color: White.
4. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood stairs and railings to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood stairs and railings to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and risers no more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position.
C. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood stairs and railings. Fill nail
holes with matching filler where exposed.
END OF SECTION 064300
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1
SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
2. XPS insulation for sub-grade application.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application,
primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a
single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces.
Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ChemMasters Corp.
2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.
3. Gardner Gibson, Inc.
4. Henry Company.
5. Karnak Corporation.
6. Koppers Inc.
7. Malarkey Roofing Products.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 2
8. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
9. Tamms Industries, Inc.
B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
E. VOC Content: Zero.
2.1 INSULATION
A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, square or shiplap
edged.
1. Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength.
2. Thickness: ½ inch or 2 inch as indicated on drawings.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended
by manufacturer.
B. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
C. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended by dampproofing
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and
other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work
have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained,
spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep
holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond
breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 3
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated
or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior.
1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum
of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces
exposed to view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane,
construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-)
wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for
embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.6 L/sq. m)
for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m) for second coat, 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less
than 3 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.2 L/sq. m), or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m).
3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install board insulation over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections
and penetrations.
B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer.
C. Provide Grade 1 installation at foundation.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 071113
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 1
SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Cold fluid-applied waterproofing.
2. Insulation drainage panels.
B. Locations: vertical foundation waterproofing applications.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's
products.
B. Inspection: Owner to engage a licensed professional inspector to validate Contractor’s installation of
foundation waterproofing, including connections to subdrainage and sump systems on all buildings under
this Contract.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and
pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and flashings,
installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.
1.6 STORAGE
A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within
the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Protect stored
materials from direct sunlight.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 2
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate,
when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above
dew point.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer and Installer, and agreeing to
repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight
for a period of five years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing:
a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW-525, basis of design.
b. Miradri, T. C.; Miraseal.
c. Neogard, Div. of Jones-Blair; Neogard 7403/7405.
d. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Deck B.T.
e. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 500.
f. Sonneborne, Div. of ChemRex Inc.; HLM 5000.
2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836.
B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer.
C. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil- (1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining uncured sheet neoprene.
1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
D. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.
2.3 INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with
ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with
shiplap or channel edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-
free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic
sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
B. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing
fluids.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating
contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids.
E. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at
expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply a double thickness of waterproofing and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat
when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
F. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with
ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.
G. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according
to ASTM C 898.
3.2 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases,
with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50
mils (1.3 mm) at any point.
B. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent
construction operations.
3.3 INSULATION DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of
projections and penetrations.
B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 4
3.4 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING
A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent
contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended
by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071416
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill).
2. Concealed building insulation.
3. Sound attenuation insulation.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test
performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per
"Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from
another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning
characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC INSULATION
A. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive
strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2
2.2 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION
A. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5.
1. Basis of Design: Certainteed “Optima”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or
snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with
insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and
lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to
make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
A. Butt panels together for tight fit.
B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways
on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other
obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties
designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
B. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction according to curtain-wall manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window
frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation
securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated
on Drawings between insulation and glass.
2. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces indicated, either by pouring or by machine blowing, to comply with
ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform
density, but do not compact excessively.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to
prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
END OF SECTION 072100
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flexible flashing.
2. Drainage material.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber
compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to
produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
1. Provide products compatible with building wrap.
B. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded
polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
1. Provide products compatible with building wrap.
2.2 DRAINAGE MATERIAL
A. Drainage Material: Product shall maintain a continuous open space between water-resistive barrier and
exterior cladding to create a drainage plane and shall be used under siding.
1. Rainscreen Mesh: ¼” thick.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-
or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
3.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. Install drainage material over building wrap and flashing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION 072500
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 1
SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyethylene vapor retarders for underslab installation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for vapor retarders integral with insulation products.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 15-mil thick sheet, with maximum permeance rating of
0.1 perm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS UNDER SLABS
A. Install vapor retarders over prepared grade. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and seal with
manufacturer's recommended tape. Install second layer over pathways to equipment.
B. Extend vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation wall or grade beam with manufacturer's
recommended tape.
1. Extend vapor retarder vertically minimum 6 inches above top of footing.
2. Vapor barrier must not be penetrated once installed, or penetrations must be sealed prior to
pouring the slab.
3. Slabs poured directly on top of vapor barrier.
4. No sand layer on top of vapor barrier.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 2
C. Seal around penetrations such as utilities and columns in order to create a monolithic, airtight membrane
at grade surface, perimeter, and all vertical penetrations.
END OF SECTION 072600
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 1
SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior weathering corrugated metal roof panels.
2. Fascia, flashing and trim adjacent to metal roofing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for canopy support.
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal work that
is not part of metal wall panel assemblies.
3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants adjoining sheet metal roofing.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140.
B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-
resistance class indicated.
1. Uplift Rating: UL 120.
C. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on
testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:
a. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa), acting inward or outward.
2. Snow Loads: per structural engineer.
3. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads with vertical
deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 2
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge
conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and
accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.
1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12
inches (1:10):
a. Flashing and trim.
b. Gutters.
c. Downspouts.
d. Z-shaped purlins.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and coordinated
with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Roof panels and attachments.
2. Purlins and rafters.
3. Roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations,
lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items mounted on roof curbs.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with energy
performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
G. Product test reports.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Maintenance data.
J. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies
tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual
equipment provided.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 3
B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, purlins
and rafters, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal
roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Corrugated Steel Sheet: A606 Corten weathering steel.
1. Surface: Smooth, flat corrugated finish.
B. Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
C. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads
matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM,
PVC, or neoprene sealing washers.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 4
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.4 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM, CORRUGATED METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent
panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include
accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Basis of Design: Bridger Steel.
2. Product: Truten A606 Corten Naturally Weathering Steel.
3. Profile: Corrugated.
4. Panel Length: As required for minimum joints.
5. Corrugation Depth: 7/8 inch.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a
complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal
roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fascia, Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating,
minimum 0.018 inch (0.45 mm) thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and
to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases,
framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent
metal roof panels.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide
a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise
from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other
structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations
of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.
D. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance
of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel
support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by
shipping limitations.
B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each
panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels
for fasteners.
1. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement.
C. Install metal roof panels as follows:
1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. (27.8 sq. m.) in
presence of factory-authorized representative.
2. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted.
3. Install panels perpendicular to purlins.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge and hip caps.
6. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all
openings.
7. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds.
8. End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
end splices to avoid a four-panel splice condition.
9. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 6
D. Fasteners:
1. Steel Roof Panels: Use galvanized-steel fasteners.
E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using
manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.
F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof
panel manufacturer.
1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood,
ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants
indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side
joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.4 CORRUGATED ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Corrugated Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at
location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat
and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
2. Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side
of metal wall panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools
to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer
tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and protruding
equipment, vents, and accessories.
6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps; on
side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels;
and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight.
7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber
sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings,
ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 7
2. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20
feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect metal roof
panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.
B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply
with specified requirements.
C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or
additional work with specified requirements.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal
roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish
touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 074113
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213 - 1
SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes concealed-fastener lap-seam corrugated metal wall panels.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions,
joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories;
and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D. Product test reports.
E. Maintenance data.
F. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process to
comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality.
2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. 3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
4. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
B. Panel Sealants:
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920 as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections, 0.064-inch (1.63-mm) nominal thickness.
C. Zee Clips: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.
D. Base or Sill Angles or Channels: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:
1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.
F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange.
1. Nominal Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.
2. Depth: As indicated.
3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with 0.040-inch (1.02-mm)
nominal thickness.
4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire.
G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213 - 3
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color
of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene
sealing washers.
2.1 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. Provide factory or shop-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of
adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps.
Include accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with
ASTM E 1514.
B. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Berridge Manufacturing Co.
1. Profile: HR-16.
2. Material: 24-Gauge, Galvalume®.
a. Exterior Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer.
1) Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000.
b. Color: Designer select from metallic colors.
3. Joint Type:
a. Horizontal, integral hook with concealed fastener.
b. Vertical, connecting end trim J-channels.
4. Panel Coverage: per Drawings.
5. Panel Height: per Drawings.
6. Corrugation Depth: 7/8 inch.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including
trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels.
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-
cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary
to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch (0.46-mm) minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as
required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213 - 4
to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits,
reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible,
by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional
and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with
joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a
tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel
assembly.
E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at
location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and
weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal
wall panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools
to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer
tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.
B. Zee Clips: Provide Zee clips of size indicated or, if not indicated, as required to act as standoff from subgirts
for thickness of insulation indicated. Attach to subgirts with fasteners.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
METAL PLATE WALL PANELS 074213 - 5
3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings,
corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will
be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed,
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall
panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in
a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
END OF SECTION 074213
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition of existing roof system to 2x6 decking.
2. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system over reroofed areas, including:
a. Adhered vapor retarder.
b. Adhered insulation to provide support around existing roof top piping.
c. Adhered nailbase insulation.
d. Fastened new insulation.
e. Adhered cover board.
f. Coated TPO sheet metal flashing at scuppers.
3. Plaza deck paver system.
4. Provide alternate for fully adhered system without nailboard component.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counterflashings.
4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.
B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base
flashings shall remain watertight.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 2
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions
of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
C. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof
Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.
D. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been
successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspection agency to resist uplift pressure calculated
according to ANSI / SPRI’s WD-1 “Wind Design Standard Practice for Roofing Assemblies” whichever
is greater or more stringent and conforming to those pressures and calculations contained in Section 1609
of the IBC / International Building Code – 2018 including Local Amendments.
E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated;
testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
F. Coordinate work of this section with Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”
G. Design Pressures: As indicated on the Structural Drawings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
4. Nailbase insulation panels.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Sheet roofing, of color specified.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Walkway pads or rolls.
4. Metal termination bars.
5. Six fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with
requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES.
H. Field quality-control reports.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 3
I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system
identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's
special warranty.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as
membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class C; for application and roof slopes indicated, as
determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall
be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies identical to those
of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products
with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
F. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and
installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories
and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including
flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,
and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency
markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within
the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct
sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 4
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of
deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty
requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover
boards, substrate board, roofing accessories and other components of membrane roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section,
signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system
such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor
retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced,
uniform, flexible TPO sheet.
1. Thickness: 80 mils, nominal.
2. Exposed Face Color: Gray.
2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 60 mils
thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 5
D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), prepunched.
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to
membrane roofing system manufacturer.
G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and
other accessories.
H. SBS Vapor Retarder: 40 mil thick self-adhering SBS asphalt laminated to a reinforced polyethylene face.
I. TPO-Coated Metal Flashing: for formation of custom flashing elements, including scuppers and roof
edge.
2.3 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane roofing
manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses
indicated.
B. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, with factory-applied facing board on one
major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other.
1. Type V, OSB facer, 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick.
C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat
facer on both major surfaces.
D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12
inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for
sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatibility with membrane roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-applied, low-rise, one-
or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another
insulation layer.
D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch
thick, factory primed.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 6
2.5 ROOF DECK PAVER SYSTEM
A. Roof Pavers: Pavers designed for installation on pedestals provided by manufacturer.
1. Basis of Design: Bison Innovative Products.
a. Product: Standard wood tiles selected by Architect.
2. Size: 24 by 24 inches. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) in length, height, and thickness.
B. Paver Pedestals: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-density polyethylene, or polyurethane
paver support assembly, including fixed-height, adjustable or stackable pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs
for deck joist attachment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof
drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations
and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in
Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating
onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain
is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering
completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and
discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. SBS Vapor Retarder: Install in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping
each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively. Clean and prime
substrate to self-adhere membrane.
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement
into membrane roofing system.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 7
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation
or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.
C. Cut and adhere initial layer of polyiso insulation to surround existing piping at roof deck. Install
sufficient height to provide clearance over second layer of composite insulation.
D. Adhere composite nailbase roof insulation over first layer of insulation and piping to completely bridge
piping. Do not allow joints to fall over piping areas.
E. Install tapered insulation where required to slope 1/4:12 to drains.
F. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness
is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered
from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
G. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not
restrict flow of water.
H. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered
between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with
insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
I. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered
between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
Loosely butt cover boards together and adhere to insulation.
1. Adhere cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
2. Set cover board in adhesive, firmly pressing in place.
3.5 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by
manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area
of membrane roofing.
E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and
perimeter of roofing.
F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 8
G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane
roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of
sheet membrane.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of once daily and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with
clamping ring.
3.6 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially
dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end
laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.
F. Install TPO-Coated parapet scupper and trim flashing at locations indicated on drawings and roof edge
locations. Weld membrane to flashing.
3.7 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION
A. Lay loose 12 by 12 inch TPO squares under each pedestal.
B. Accurately install paver pedestals and accessories in locations and to elevations required. Adjust for final
level and slope with shims.
C. Install pavers to pedestals per manufacturer recommendations.
D. Maintain tolerances of decking installation within 1/4 inch in 10 feet (1:48) of surface plane in any
direction.
E. Immediately remove any fallen screws or materials from TPO roofing membrane.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing
installation on completion.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that
they do not comply with specified requirements.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 9
D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or
additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage,
describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 075423
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 10
3.10 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS
of , herein called the "Roofing Installer," has
performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
1. Owner:
2. Address:
3. Building Name/Type:
4. Address:
5. Area of Work:
6. Acceptance Date:
7. Warranty Period:
8. Expiration Date:
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for
designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth,
that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs
to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary
to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and
to building contents, caused by:
a. Lightning;
b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 120 mph;
c. Fire;
d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection,
deterioration, and decomposition;
e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment
supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel,
other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until
such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been
paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for
consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of
work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment
of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on
date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this
Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not
become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 11
Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage
or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not
originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use
or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date
of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or
deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to
examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall
not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to
Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing
Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the
Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a
subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day
of , .
1. Authorized Signature: .
2. Name: .
3. Title: .
END OF ROOFING INSTALLER WARRANTY
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed metal framing supporting
metal wall panels.
2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
3. Division 07 Roofing Sections for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane
roofing.
4. Division 07 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall
panels.
5. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,
vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
6. Refer to Section 077100 for metal cap flashings, i.e. copings installed with roof system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations
and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim,
including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint
covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.
D. Maintenance data.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture,
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall
not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to
dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to
SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1. Design Pressure: per Structural Engineer of Record.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied
finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish
required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3
a. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat.
2. Color: Match roof and wall panels.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation
and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to
withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-
applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being
fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal
gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead
or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with
release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm)
wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene
plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by
aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on
faces exposed to view.
B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed
within joints.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant
unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
F. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Downspouts: Fabricate square downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers,
from same material as downspouts, and anchors. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
3. Configuration: architect select.
4. Finish: architect select.
B. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 22 gauge.
C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-
wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions
and shape required, complete with outlet tubes. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
2.5 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not
exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate
discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall
openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5
1. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge.
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill and similar flashings to extend 4 inches
(100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams.
Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not
rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing
and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams
with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by SMACNA.
1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating
where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates,
install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene
sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement
joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with
sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws; metal decking not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
F. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6
3.2 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to
cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing
with installation of roof-drainage system.
B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60
inches (1500 mm) o.c.
C. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in asphalt roofing cement or
elastomeric sealant compatible with the substrate.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall
face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum of 1 inch
(25 mm) below scupper or gutter discharge.
F. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap
joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow.
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal
manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work
with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge
flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch (75-mm) centers.
C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of
roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to
pipes that penetrate roof.
3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to
SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation
of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit
Masonry” and “Stone Masonry."
C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4
inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 076200
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof hatches.
B. Refer to Section 055100 for steel railings necessary for safety railings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required and for each type of roof
accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for
fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coated and mill phosphatized for field
painting.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
type of use and mill finish.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 2
2.3 ROOF HATCHES
A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single-wall curb
frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and
equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bilco Company (The).
b. Custom Curb, Inc.
c. J. L. Industries, Inc.
d. Nystrom, Inc.
2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-
kPa) internal loads.
3. Type: Single-leaf lid.
4. Size: 36 by 36 inches.
5. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick.
6. Finish: Baked enamel or powder-coated.
7. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.
8. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal
lid.
9. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal
curb.
10. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
11. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height constant.
12. Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and
padlock hasps inside and outside.
13. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full
extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants,
and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof
accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.
B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood,
ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet,
or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturers for waterproof performance.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 3
D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment,
excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
E. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
END OF SECTION 077200
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1
SECTION 078413 – PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated
constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire,
according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
1. Firestopping items indicated below are designed to coordinate with wall ratings as determined by
ASTM E119 and UL 263, in accordance with the relevant version of the IBC as indiated on
Drawings.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per
ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not
less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with
T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to
potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers,
provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings indicated of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq.
ft (0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m) at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F (204 deg C).
C. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined
per UL-2079, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in
which the joint occurs.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide
products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant
through-penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor
loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of
less than 25 and smoke-developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including
illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition
penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's
illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with
modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-
protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of
Firestop Contractors."
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive
joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing
and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection
services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced
in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification
marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop
systems are installed according to specified requirements.
E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind
other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and
to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by
the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the
designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3
a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation.
b. Ceramic fiber.
c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of
fill materials in liquid state.
d. Fire-rated formboard.
e. Joint fillers for joint sealants.
f. Temporary forming materials.
g. Substrate primers.
h. Collars.
i. Steel sleeves.
C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply
with system performance and other requirements.
2.2 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating,
and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating.
B. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex formulation.
C. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation.
D. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic
fibers, or silicone compounds.
E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side.
F. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project
site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame-spread and smoke-developed
ratings of zero per ASTM E 84.
G. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight
aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a
combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.
I. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in
place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant
of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
K. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component, synthetic-
polymer-based sealant of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4
2.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants
of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint
sealants.
B. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use
NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT,
and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as
applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's
directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection
of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply
with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating
items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will
remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged
by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape
as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the through-
penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5
achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials,
remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193,
and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce
the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability.
Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing
begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance
rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of
joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner’s inspecting agency may examine completed firestopping to determine if it is being installed in
compliance with requirements.
B. Owner’s inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
C. Code-related inspections will be performed by the relevant authorities with jurisdiction.
D. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued.
E. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which
opening and joints occur.
B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to
produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 078413
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to
this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete, stone and metal panel systems.
b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
c. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and
elevator entrances.
d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
e. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated
construction.
2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide exterior elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project
joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in
Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
4. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2
5. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
6. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
7. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.
8. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull
distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively,
retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
9. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be
considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the
standard range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Application shall be done by a Joint Sealant Subcontractor with five years’
experience. Submit documentation to the Architect and Owner
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Technical Assistance: Materials shall be supplied by manufacturer who will provide
qualified technical assistance at the Project site.
D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing
to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and
other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Tremco Manufacturing.
2. Dow.
3. General Electric.
4. Pecora Corporation.
5. Maneco International.
6. Sika Corporation.
7. Sonneborn Building Products.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant.
B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is required provide products
with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per
ASTM C 719, to withstand the percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and
remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for
Project.
D. Interior Silicone Rubber Sealant:
1. Silicone rubber-base, one-part elastomeric sealant, complying ASTM C920, Type S, Class 50,
Grade NS.
2. Use acid-type for non-porous joint surfaces, and non-acid type where one or both joint surfaces are
porous.
3. For wet areas use type compounded specifically for mildew resistance.
4. Use for interior joints between equipment or countertops and walls.
E. Exterior Sealant:
1. Two-Component Polyurethane: Polyurethane-based, 2-part elastomeric sealant, complying with
ASTM C920 Type M, Class 50, Grade NS/SL Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Dynatrol II.”
2. One-Component Silicone:
a. Concrete Surfaces: DOWSIL 790 by Dow.
b. Stone, Metal and Glass Surfaces: DOWSIL 795 by Dow.
3. For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self-
leveling), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Urexpan NR-200.”
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product.
B. One-component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion sealant, one-part, mildew resistant and paintable,
complying with ASTM C834, recommended by manufacturer for general use as an exposed building
construction sealant, Pecora AC-20.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Provide manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to
reduce transmission of airborne sound.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands.
b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98; Pecora Corp.
b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-
modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing silicone
sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
B. Preformed Foam Sealants: Provide manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated,
open-cell foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying,
water-repellent agent; factory produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths
indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by
manufacturer; and complying with the following:
1. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with
joint substrates and other joint sealants.
2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Density: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Backing: Pressure-sensitive adhesive, factory applied to one side with protective wrapping.
2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants
with joint substrates.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning
operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces
include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer.
Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back
of joints.
F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
H. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
2. Apply a bead of silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with
preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's printed schedule and covering a bonded area of
not less than a 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead inside of masking tape by 1/4 inch (6
mm).
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and
substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant
and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of horizontal joints before installing vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over
horizontal joints. At end of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.
I. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to produce seal continuity at ends, turns,
and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant
requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner to engage a testing agency to provide the following.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8
B. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 5 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull
Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend
cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant
manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names
of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion
results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used
originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant
contacts original sealant.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
SECTION 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel doors.
2. Steel door frames.
3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each
frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and
installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those within the Construction Documents.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with the Steel Door Institute Standard ANSI A250.8-1998
(SDI 100) "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame
assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by
UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that are rated for maximum of 250
degrees F temperature rise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Therma-Tru Corporation.
2. Assa Abloy Group.
3. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial
quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M),
commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating designation, mill
phosphatized.
C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick steel sheet; 0.0516-
inch- (1.3-mm-) thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior
walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of
fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E
136 for combustion characteristics.
2.3 DOORS
A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick doors of materials and ANSI A250.8-1998 (SDI 100)
grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: Grade II, Heavy-Duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 18 gauge thick cold-
rolled steel sheet faces.
2. Exterior Doors: Exterior Doors: Grade III, Extra Heavy-Duty, Model 2, seamless design,
minimum 16 gauge thick galvanized steel sheet faces.
a. Insulated Cores: polyurethane core for non-rated doors at exterior.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according to
ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered and caulked welded corners.
2. Interior frames: 16 gauge steel sheet.
3. Exterior frames: 14 gauge galvanized steel sheet.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, frames to be provided with 9/32” silencer
preparation for the receipt of 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames, and 2 silencers on heads
of double-door frames.
2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as door face
sheet.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm)
high unless otherwise indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as frames.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or
buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
Comply with ANSI A250.8-1998 (SDI 100) requirements.
1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to
SDI standards:
a. Resin-impregnated paper honeycomb.
b. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591.
c. Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578.
d. Vertical steel stiffeners.
e. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom.
3. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-
rolled steel sheet.
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and
frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as
an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized
steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of
doors against water penetration.
1. At exterior locations.
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled,
provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to
ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of 0.41 Btu/sq.
ft. x h x deg F (2.33 W/sq. m x K) or better.
H. Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies
fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested according to ASTM E 1408, and classified according to
ASTM E 413.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33 or better.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according
to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable
requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for
hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing, and provisions for
fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
J. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of
stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal
work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite
is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and
frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of
installation indicated.
K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
L. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and
Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes.
C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.
2.8 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non-petroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating
applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair
paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized
steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air-
dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment.
1. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of
FS TT-P-641, Type II.
C. Finishes per drawings.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5
2.9 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1
acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a
sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment.
D. Finishes per drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data,
and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately
in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction,
place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-
stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI
A250.8-1998 (SDI 100).
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80.
2. Smoke-Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than
9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner.
END OF SECTION 081113
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces for transparent finish.
2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Frames” for metal frames to receive wood doors.
3. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other
pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory finished doors.
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each
material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples
showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.
2. Corner sections of doors, 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials
to be used.
3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards Illustrated" or WI's "Manual of Millwork."
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to
NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package pre-finished doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in
plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather tight,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient
temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in wood face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
span.
c. Telegraphing of core construction and delaminating of face in decorative laminate-faced
doors.
2. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation according to manufacturer's
written warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
B. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2.
2. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).
D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on
testing according to UL 1784.
E. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection
rating indicated.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile.
Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2.3 VENEERED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid Core Doors:
1. Grade and Faces: Face grades as note below; veneer minimum 1/50-inch (0.5mm) thickness at
moisture content of 12% or less.
a. Species: Architect select.
2. Match between Veneer Leaves: Designer select.
3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Designer select.
4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
5. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor door faces
do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more.
6. Transom Match: Continuous match.
7. Vertical Edges: Matching same species as faces. Wood or composite material, one piece,
laminated, or veneered. Minimum requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance Standards
for Architectural Wood Flush Doors.
8. Horizontal Edges: Solid wood or structural composite material meeting the minimum
requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance Standards for Architectural Wood Flush
Doors.
9. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit sanded before
applying face veneers.
10. Fire rating per Door Schedule.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered
noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-
protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and
fire-protection rating indicated.
B. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads as follows
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.
3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing
clips approved for such use.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced
quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware schedules,
door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before
factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire
rated doors.
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish
as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same
as door stiles.
D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09
Section "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.
B. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.
2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including
fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted
on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Transparent Finish: Provide a clear protective coating over the wood veneer allowing the natural color
and grain of the selected wood species to provide the appearance specified. Stain is applied to the wood
surface underneath the transparent finish to add color and design flexibility.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: Meet or exceed WDMA I.S. 1A TR6 Catalyzed Polyurethane finish performance
requirements.
3. Stain: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Sheen: Per Designer.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles
and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of
door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory Machined Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated
doors. Machine doors for hardware, and reseal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Align doors to frame for uniform clearances as follows:
2. Head and jambs: 1/8 inch
3. Bottom: 3/8 inch to finished floor, 1/8 inch
4. Meeting Stile: 1/8 inch
5. Fire rated assemblies: per NFPA Bulletin 80.
6. Bevel non-fire-rated doors: 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges
7. Bevel fire-rated doors: 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent
permitted by labeling agency
F. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project
site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 6
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or
refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of access doors:
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Coordinate location of access panels with Architect via shop drawings before installation.
C. Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for the entire Project from one source and by a single
manufacturer.
B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary
slightly from sizes indicated.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed
plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals"
Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated in the work include the following:
1. J.L. Industries.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2
2. Milcor, Inc.
3. Bilco
4. Ceco Products
5. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591M), Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet with Class
C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for electrostatically painting.
B. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so
surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited
to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded
areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
2. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard
thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than
1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Color: Match adjacent ceiling and wall color.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS
A. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1. Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch
for gypsum board infill.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board
surfaces.
4. Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge.
5. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch.
6. Finish: Paint to match adjacent wall color.
B. Sizes: as indicated on Drawings.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with
adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to
types of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 inch wide around perimeter of frame.
2. For gypsum board assemblies, furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board in accordance
with Drywall Flange-Flush Doors requirements within this section.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including
sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and
anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other
construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with
adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Install concealed-frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces.
D. Provide the owner with all related access doors and frames hardware, keys, maintenance manuals and
warranties at time of substantial completion.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 084113 - 1
SECTION 084113 – ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior storefront and window framing systems.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal
and structural movement without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies
similar to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes the following:
1. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits.
2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural move-
ment, to glazing units.
B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.
C. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior from alu-
minum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance.
D. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leakage
through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s/sq. m) of fixed wall area
when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75.2 Pa).
E. Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through
fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure
of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design
Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa). Water leakage is
defined as follows:
1. Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interior sur-
faces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is
drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leak-
age.
F. Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate structural
movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection.
G. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional toler-
ances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 084113 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For entrance and storefront systems. Show details of fabrication and installation, in-
cluding plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and contraction, and
attachments to other work.
1. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, quanti-
ties, and locations.
B. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard sizes.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range
of variations expected.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified require-
ments.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a quali-
fied independent testing agency, indicate compliance of entrance and storefront systems with require-
ments based on comprehensive testing of current systems.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
2. Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Failure of operating components to function normally.
5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas.
B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Storefront Window System: Kawneer Trifab 451UT Thermally Broken
1. Glazing: per Section 088000.
2. Framing: Thermally-broken.
3. Stile Width: 2 by 4 ½ inches (medium stile).
4. Accessories: Slip track at head if required.
5. Finish: Anodized color selected by Architect.
6. Assembly U-value: per Drawing values.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 084113 - 3
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, com-
plying with the requirements of standards indicated below.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, and
bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot-rolled sheet
and strip.
C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure-glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets,
setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended
by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket
assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
F. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified in Divi-
sion 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, ex-
cept containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped
or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark compo-
nents to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing.
C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.
D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrat-
ing within the system to the exterior.
E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing compo-
nents to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize
distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by
descaling or grinding.
F. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to
FGMA's "Glazing Manual."
G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for
this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 084113 - 4
H. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide
subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Fac-
tory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation.
2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are
not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
D. Color Finish: AAMA 2605 Permafluor 70% PVDF. Three-coat fluoropolymer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing en-
trance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline
joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for
this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating
within the system to the exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, un-
less otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp
or rack of framing members.
F. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless oth-
erwise indicated.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm
in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT WINDOWS 084113 - 5
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
END OF SECTION 084113
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 1
SECTION 085200 ÐALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Fixed and operable aluminum-clad wood-framed windows.
2. Aluminum-clad wood doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:
1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine the structural
test pressure and water test pressure.
B. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design
pressure.
C. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be
tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for
performance class.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based
on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size
required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following
loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed
indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to
ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade
indicated on Drawings.
2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than
1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design pressure based on
testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test
or structural computations.
REVISED 3/12/24
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood
window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work,
operational clearances, installation details, and the following:
1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. Joinery details.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather-stripping details.
6. Thermal-break details.
7. Glazing details.
8. Window cleaning provisions.
9. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and
assembly of wood windows and used to determine the following:
a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated.
b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For wood windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long, full-size sections of window frame with factory-
applied color finish.
2. Window Corner Fabrication: 12--by-12-inch- (300--by-300-mm-) long, full-size window corner
including full-size sections of window frame with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping,
and glazing.
3. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish.
4. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long sections.
E. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by
a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of wood window. Test results based on use
of downsized test units will not be accepted.
H. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping and finishes to
include in maintenance manuals.
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 3
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units
required for this Project.
1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wood windows, including Shop Drawings,
based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to
those indicated for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood windows that meet or exceed
performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by
labels, test reports, and calculations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood windows and
are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not
modify size and dimensional requirements.
E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration
Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions
and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
F. Mullion Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 450 for testing of mullions. Provide performance class
C (Commercial).
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's
"Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup for type(s) of window(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood windows without field
measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond
to established dimensions.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood
windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 4
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal
weathering.
e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Wood Finish: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Basis of Design: Pella Corporation Designer Series.
2. Glazing: Advanced Low-E HA IG
a. PEL-N-121-01519-00001
b. U-Factor .29.
3. Operable Window Types: refer to Window Schedule.
4. Interior Wood Species: Douglas Fir.
5. Exterior Metal Finish: Powder-coated. Architect select color.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood: Fine-grained lumber as specified above; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time
of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than
1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide; water-repellent preservative treated.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard
baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603 or AAMA 620.
1. High-Performance Organic Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion
coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system
consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with
AAMA 2604.
1) Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members.
Argon Fill
Lifestyle Series
3. Casement: Dual Pane Vent,
a. U-value = 0.28, SHGC = 0.27, Glass 3 mm.
PEL-N-14-00685-00001
2. Fixed-frame Direct Set:
a. U-value = 0.27, SHGC = 0.32, Glass 4 mm.
PEL-N-18-02796-00001
3. Clad Patio Door:
a. U-value = 0.28, SHGC = 0.22, Glass 3 mm.
PEL-N-18-02796-00001
4.
5.
6.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 5
D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by
manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware,
anchors, and other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For
application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as
appropriate.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand
design pressure indicated.
F. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying
with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with
ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure
indicated.
G. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently
resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when wood window is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C 509.
2. Weather-Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
H. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon
pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702.
1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid,
polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 701/702.
I. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702.
2.3 WINDOW
A. Window Types: Casement, Fixed, Projected awning and sliding glass doors as indicated on Drawings.
B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of performance indicated that
comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide wood windows tested for thermal performance according
to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 42.
D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at
15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to
ASTM E 1423.
1. U-Factor: per architect.
E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of
0.22, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.
1. SHGC: per architect.
swinging
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 6
F. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 30 STC when tested for
laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.
G. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test.
1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (5 cu. m/h x sq. m) of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq.
ft. (300 Pa).
H. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test
pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water
Resistance Test.
1. Test Pressure: 20 percent of positive design pressure, but not more than 15 lbf/sq. ft. (720 Pa).
I. Life-Cycle Testing: Test according to AAMA 910 and comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
J. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for
operating window types indicated.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing
requirements applicable to glazed wood window units.
B. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second
or third surface, complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel
complying with AAMA 907 or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and metal
cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to
accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use metal in frictional contact with other
metals. Where exposed, provide die-cast zinc with special coating finish or nonmagnetic stainless steel.
B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902.
C. Sill Cap/Track: Extruded-metal track with natural anodized finish or rigid PVC or other weather-resistant
plastic track with manufacturer's standard integral color, of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated;
designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior.
D. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction
indicated and operated from the inside only. Provide custodial locks.
E. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.
F. Limit Devices: Provide limit devices designed to restrict sash or ventilator opening.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 7
2.6 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement,
with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window
frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.
1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum
Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Architectural C-24 class.
2. Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," for
minimum standards of appearance, fabrication, attachment of screen fabric, hardware, and
accessories unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable
PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.
1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with
minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.
2. Finish: Match aluminum window members.
C. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3-mm) mesh of 0.011-inch- (0.28-mm-) diameter, coated
aluminum wire.
1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Charcoal gray.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and
anchoring windows.
B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied.
E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for
support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for
movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide
mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches (2500 mm width plus
length), glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply
with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
G. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing"
and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.
H. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest
extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for
scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 8
2.8 WOOD FINISHES
A. Factory-Finished Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard factory finish. Apply finish to exposed
exterior and interior wood surfaces.
1. Color: Transparent stain and finish per Section 099300 for interior wood. Provide UV-resistant
finish materials.
2. Gloss: Matte or semi-gloss per Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows,
hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows and doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other
adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points
of contact with other materials.
E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points
and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving
parts.
F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and
finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction
period.
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections.
J. Indicate testing phases on Drawings.
K. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed
systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on
Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas
show compliance with requirements.
1. Structural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to
recommendations in ASTM C 1401.
a. Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," in ASTM C 1401, Appendix X2,
shall be used.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS AND DOORS 085200 - 9
1) A minimum of two areas on each building face shall be tested.
2) Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
2. Structural-Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum-framed systems is complete,
structural-sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to recommendations in
ASTM C 1401.
3. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory
testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per
sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure
difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
4. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum static-air-
pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing
under "Performance Requirements" Article (10 psf) and shall not evidence water penetration.
5. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet (23
m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to
AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
L. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
M. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
N. See Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and
Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.
O. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
P. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 085200
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 1
SECTION 086200 – UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Self-flashing unit skylights for installation without site-built roof curbs.
2. Remove, clean and reinstall existing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and blocking at unit skylights.
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing at unit skylights.
3. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, limit
switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches for unit skylight
operating system.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide unit skylights of performance class and grade
indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to
supporting structure and other adjoining work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section of each
unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size.
D. Product Schedule: For unit skylights.
E. Qualification data.
F. Product test reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Maintenance data.
I. Sample warranty.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or exceed
performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by
labels, test reports, and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of units
required for this Project.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Plastic Glazing: Provide plastic glazing sheets identical to those
tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343 deg C) or more for plastic sheets in thickness indicated
when tested per ASTM D 1929.
2. Smoke-Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 84 on plastic sheets in
manner indicated for use.
b. Smoke Density: 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in thickness
indicated for use.
3. Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM D 635.
a. Acrylic Glazing: Class CC2, burning rate of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) per minute or less for
nominal thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or thickness indicated for use.
b. Polycarbonate Glazing: Class CC1, burning extent of 1 inch (25 mm) or less for nominal
thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or thickness indicated for use.
D. Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration
Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for minimum
standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more
stringent requirements if indicated.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of unit skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Components:
1. Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper to suit forming operations and finish
requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of alclad Alloy 3005-H25.
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper to suit structural and finish
requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of Alloy 6063-T52.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 3
2.2 Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal
as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened.
A. Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable, extruded monolithic sheets, UV resistant, burglar-resistance
rated per UL 972, and with average impact strength of 12 to 16 ft-lb/in. (640 to 854 J/m) of width when
tested per ASTM D 256, Test Method A (Izod).
B. Glazing Gaskets: EPDM, neoprene, partially vulcanized butyl tape, or liquid-applied elastomeric sealant.
2.3 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum glazing
retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance requirements
indicated.
B. Integral Curb: Extruded-aluminum, self-flashing type.
1. Height: 8 inches.
2. Construction: Double wall.
3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid type.
C. Prefabricated Curb: As specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
D. Unit Shape and Size: Per drawings.
E. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to
collect and drain condensation to the exterior.
F. Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterior and interior metal
framing.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coating.
B. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, designed for trowel application or other adhesive
compatible with roofing system.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
1. Color: Designer select.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation,
roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly
and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for installing
unit skylights.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but before
installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.
C. Perform test for total area of each unit skylight.
D. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 086200
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding barn doors.
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Electromechanical door hardware.
3. Automatic operators.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.
2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
3. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 - Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and Smoke
Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors.
8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as
applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of
that standard:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series.
2. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. ANSI/UL 294 - Access Control System Units.
4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware.
5. ANSI/UL 437- Key Locks.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and
assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware
Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish
of door hardware.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams
for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system
electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
Include the following:
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required
at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying
schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying
system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions.
Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.
E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for
each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01,
Closeout Procedures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented
experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a
proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory (CPD).
C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and
electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a
minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware
installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier
recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a
warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and
Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
E. Automatic Operator Supplier Qualifications: Power operator products and accessories are required to be
supplied and installed through the Norton Preferred Installer (NPI) program. Suppliers are to be factory
trained, certified, and a direct purchaser of the specified power operators and be responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the units and accessories indicated for the Project.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single
source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a
secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.
H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project
Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule
document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
I. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division
01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and
Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door
hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the
installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective
products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including
electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include
the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as
required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work
performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered
to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site
without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related
accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to
the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work
specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply
with indicated requirements.
B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled
electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power
junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection
alarm systems.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-
wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and
access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this
Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Warranty Period: Unless otherwise indicated, warranty shall be one year from date of Substantial
Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and
each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door
hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are
abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and
in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures.
Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified
in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30
inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door
thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges
unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges
unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set screw
in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin
while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.
B. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: Hardware is to be of type and design as specified and should
conform with ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
1. Sliding Bi-Passing Pocket Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of track, hangers,
stops, bumpers, floor channel, guides, and accessories indicated.
2. Cascading: Provide a bi-parting or single direction telescoping system as required with a minimum
200 lb. per door capacity.
3. Bi-folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 125 lb.
4. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 200 lb.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6
2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 door pushes and pull units of type and design specified
in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting
hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges,
secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets.
Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum
clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.
4. Pulls, where applicable, shall be provided with a 10” clearance from the finished floor on the push
side to accommodate wheelchair accessibility.
5. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key
systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and types:
1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
2. Rim cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.
3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks.
4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks.
5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and
be free spinning with matching finishes.
6. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.
C. Small Format Interchangeable Cores: Provide small format interchangeable cores (SFIC) as specified,
core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.
D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions
and requirements.
2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control
number as directed by Owner.
3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.
E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3).
2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
F. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.
G. Key Registration List (Bitting List):
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key
control software.
2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1
Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant
steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.
1. Heavy duty mortise locks shall have a ten-year warranty.
2. Where specified, provide status indicators with highly reflective color and wording for
“locked/unlocked” or “vacant/occupied” with custom wording options if required. Indicator to be
located above the cylinder with the inside thumb-turn not blocking the visibility of the indicator
status. Indicator window size to be a minimum of 2.1” x 0.6” with a curved design allowing a 180-
degree viewing angle with protective covering to prevent tampering.
B. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Operational
Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed.
1. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
C. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
D. Residential Tubular Locking Devices: Standard ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2.
1. Tubular locksets, deadbolts, and handlesets designed to fit ANSI standard door preps.
2. Locks are to be non-handed and have adjustable backset.
2.6 ACCESS CONTROL LOCKING DEVICES
A. Keyless Entry Locking Devices: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 locking mechanism. Units can be
stand alone or Z-Wave® or ZigBee® enabled (controller by others). Locks to offer optional key override
feature. Battery-operated, with low power indicator. Touchscreen or keypad models as indicated in the
hardware sets.
2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Narrow Case Deadlocks and Deadlatches: ANSI/BHMA 156.13 Series 1000 Grade 1 narrow case
deadlocks and deadlatches for swinging or sliding door applications. All functions shall be manufactured
in a single sized case formed from 12 gauge minimum, corrosion resistant steel (option for fully stainless
steel case and components). Provide minimum 2 7/8" throw laminated stainless steel bolt. Bottom rail
deadlocks to have 3/8” diameter bolts.
2.8 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as
follows:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum
framing.
4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue
hardware applications.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.9 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Exit devices shall have a five-year warranty.
2. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and
labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by
manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and
with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for
installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for
specific requirements.
4. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar
and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where
specified in Hardware Sets.
5. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the
push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind
the device as in a full glass configuration.
6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty
escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match
that of the specified locksets.
b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as
specified in Hardware Sets.
7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at
interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof
strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware
Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified Products
Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the
Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
C. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9
in the Hardware Sets. Fabricate latchbolts from cast stainless steel, Pullman type, incorporating a
deadlocking feature.
2.10 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same
type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-
handed with full sized covers.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for
use of fire rated doors.
3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers
depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers
are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act, provide
units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware
Sets.
5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on
door for optimum aesthetics.
6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting
brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and
security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products
Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power
adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and
opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body
construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-
handed units standard.
C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products
Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power
adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and
opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body
construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-
handed units standard.
D. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Utility Grade): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products
Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, utility grade door closers with complete spring power
adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6. Closers to be rack and pinion type, cast aluminum case construction, with
adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide closer standard packed for
regular, top-jamb, and parallel arm type mounting applications.
2.11 ELECTROHYDRAULIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and
movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms
with door operation, hinges, and activation devices.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency.
B. Standard: Conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not
more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to
fully open door.
2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or
opening.
D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single swinging and
pair of swinging doors.
E. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility
guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by
ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer
with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power.
F. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed,
backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay,
obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.
G. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction,
electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.
H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims
for aligning system components.
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2.12 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width
(LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than
1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required
where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the
bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and
template book for specific requirements for size and applications.
4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from
the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the
Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
2.13 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall
bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door
stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where
floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD)
listed overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track,
slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy
tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and
function.
2.14 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in
the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light,
or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive
fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing
according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for
sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
2.15 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized
installation standards for application intended.
2.16 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying
with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain
manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and
other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced
standards for the applicable units of hardware
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and
scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and
adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices;
closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications,
unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written
instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are
later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted
items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the
handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by
hardware losses before and after installation.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout Procedures”. Produce project
punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved submittals and
verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of items to be completed
and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to be incomplete or rejected.
1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective Action Lists
organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images and Video
Recordings.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to
comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware
installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time
frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain
conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. Contractor to submit hardware schedule prepared by hardware specialist for Architect review.
1. Provide products and equipment coordinated with Owner requirements to link to building security
system.
END OF SECTION 087100
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 1
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, but not limited to, and
including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Storefront framing.
4. Glazed entrances.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing
publications.
B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking,
and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International
1. ASTM C 1036 Specification for Flat Glass.
2. ASTM C 1048 Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated
Glass.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to
ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Design Snow Loads: Not applicable.
REVISED 3/8/24
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 2
3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist
design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.
4. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of the
glass.
B. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within
individual glass litesThermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass
framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric
glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant
products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated including warranty.
B. Samples for selection of colors from manufacturerÕs full range of colors and textures.
C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for each type
and color of glass to be used in Project.
D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:
1. Flat glass.
2. Low E.
3. Glazing sealants.
4. Glazing gaskets.
E. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied comply with performance requirements specified.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: Comply with published standards of Flat Glass Marketing Association, latest
edition and all applicable manufacturerÕs recommendations.
1. Insulated Glass: Insulated glass shall meet performance requirements of ASTM E774 (Class
CBA). Insulating glass units shall be manufactured by a member of Insulating Glass
Certification Council (IGCC) or Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association (SIGMA).
Units shall be double sealed with ½-inch minimum air space, a single seal is not acceptable.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 3
B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each
product and installation method indicated.
D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
E. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
G. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of
Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
H. Certified Safety Glazing: Category II products complying with test requirements of 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1, certified by Safety Glazing Certification Council, and permanently labeled.
I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and
signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that
deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within
specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Final Acceptance.
C. Insulated glass units in vertical application shall have ten (10) year written warranty against seal failure.
D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed
by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that
deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within
specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Final Acceptance.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 4
PART 2 Ð PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as
needed to comply with requirements indicated.
D. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or
Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where
heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated
float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is
indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as
indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:
1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2
computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to
NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated;
of kind and condition indicated.
C. Pyrolytic-Coated, Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first
surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to
sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading.
D. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying with
other requirements specified.
E. Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying with
other requirements specified.
2.3 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements
specified.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard thermally broken spacer material and construction.
3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in
"Insulating-Glass Types" Article.
2. Spacer: "Warm-edge" thermally broken spacer material and construction.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 5
2.4 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for
this characteristic.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications
for type, grade, class, and uses.
C. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain
fire-protection rating.
2.5 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded
corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with
standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
4. Any material indicated above.
C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material
indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
4. Any material indicated above.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 6
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
C. Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets.
2.8 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A. Basis of Design: Guardian Industries.
B. Exterior Storefront Glazing: Low-E coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: ¼ inch.
3. Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Indoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass.
6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface.
7. Bird-Safe Coating: Guardian Glass SNX6227.
8. Provide safety glazing labeling.
C. Interior Storefront Glazing: Single-pane glass.
1. Thickness of Glass Lite: ¼ inch.
2. Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass.
3. Interspace Content: Air.
4. Indoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass.
5. Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SNX 62/27 with I.S. 20 coating.
6. Low-E coating:
a. #2 surface.
b. #4 surface, I.S. 20.where required.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 7
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
publications.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge
and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by
Project conditions during installation.
C. Maintain minimum glazing tolerance between glass faces and frame or metal stops as recommended by
the Flat Glass Marketing Association. For ¼-inch thick glass, maintain 1/8-inch clearance between glass
face and metal stops.
D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project
site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other
imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
sealant-substrate testing.
F. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable
for heel bead.
G. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
H. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install
correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are
used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with
system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced
glazing publications.
J. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly,
with stretch allowance during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints
miter cut and bonded together at corners.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GLAZING 088000 - 8
C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.5 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet
seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels,
and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,
including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by
glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088000
F. Follow manufacurer's recommendations regarding methods and materials used for cleaning
low-E coating on #4 surface of storefront glazing.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 - 1
SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed metal external louvers. Provide architectural louvers of finish and pattern
approved by architect for installation in exposed assemblies. Provide details of attachment to wall
systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.
2. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for field painting louvers.
3. Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using structural[ and seismic] performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver
components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to
fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.
C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated
by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to
AMCA 500-L.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models
with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 - 2
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural[ and seismic] performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Construction Specialties, Inc.
2. Nystrom Building Products.
3. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
2. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
3. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
4. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and
installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as
standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view.
2.4 FIXED METAL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal or Vertical Storm-Resistant Louver:
1. Louver Depth: 4-8 inches.
2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 0.080 inch for
frames.
3. Performance Requirements: per Mechanical Engineer.
4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
LOUVERS AND VENTS 089000 - 3
2.5 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached.
C. Louver Bird Screening: Aluminum, galvanized or stainless steel, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.05-inch wire.
2.6 WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS)
A. Extruded-Aluminum Wall Vents:
1. Extruded-aluminum louvers and frames, not less than 0.125-inch nominal thickness, assembled by
welding; with 18-by-14-mesh, aluminum insect screening on inside face; incorporating weep
holes, continuous drip at sill, and integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load-bearing design
and construction.
2.7 SHEET METAL FINISH
A. Field paint primed louvers to match adjacent finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required
to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be
refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new
units.
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar
metals.
END OF SECTION 089000
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1
SECTION 092216 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Framing and furring systems.
2. Framed suspension systems.
3. Acoustical isolation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Delegated Design: Design non-structural metal framing, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency.
C. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and
inspection agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.
C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37
mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-
(12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and
cross-furring members that interlock.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges
in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and
with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized
to friction fit inside runner.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to
interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than
indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-
(12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Acoustic furring channels. Basis of Design systems:
a. Resilient channel: Deitrich RC Deluxe (800.873.2443).
b. Furring channel isolaters: Isomax Kinetics Noise Control (877.457.2695).
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3
G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-
(12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and
depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration
without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure
to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent
devices.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend
through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4
D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet
vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to
fit into wall track.
E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in
3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel
members that will receive finishes.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls,
install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce
joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner
track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-
mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door
openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing
required above door heads.
4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
5. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On
straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
D. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
E. Z-Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place
with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced
24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 5
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending
beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of
attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm)
from corner and cut insulation to fit.
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3
mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for products finish selections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
4. Sound-absorbing ceiling units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: medium knockdown.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed
surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of
gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive
capability.
1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and
paper surfaces.
1. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type and 5/8 inch, Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.2 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch, regular type.
2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch, regular type.
B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board:
1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile Guard" by G-
P Gypsum.
2. Complying with ASTM C1177/C 1177M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus Interior
Guard" by G-P Gypsum.
3. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Core: 1/2 inch.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip
covering slot opening.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4
C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Fiberglass.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with
other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable
topping compound.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to
continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to
0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5
E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
2.7 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHES
A. Primer: mix with topcoat for smooth finish.
B. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 3: Panels that will receive medium-knockdown texture.
4. Level 4: At non-textured panel surfaces that will be exposed to view.
5. Level 5: Public areas, and as indicated on Finish Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with
edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces
with acoustical sealant.
3.2 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-
inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive tile.
C. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface
except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
D. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform
plane across panel surfaces.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for
panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Finish Level Definitions.
1. Level 0: No finish at mounted boards.
2. Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint compound. Surface shall be free
of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
3. Level 2: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with
a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener
heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of
excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the
body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint
compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level.
4. Level 3: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one
additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and
accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall
be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be
coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of final finishes. See painting/wallcovering
specification in this regard.
5. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two
separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint
compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three
separate coats of joint compound. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and
ridges. Note: It is recommended that the prepared surface be coated with a drywall primer prior to
the application of final finishes. See painting specification in this regard.
6. Level 5: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two
separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of joint
compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with three
separate coats of joint compound. A thin skim coat (Ref: Terminology, Section II, page 2) of joint
compound or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire
surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Note: It is recommended
that the prepared surface be coated with a drywall primer prior to the application of finish paint.
See painting specification in this regard.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and
other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TILING 093000 - 1
SECTION 093000 – TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and selections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following items to be furnished by Owner:
1. Floor and wall tile as indicated on the Finish Specifications.
2. Cementitious backer units installed as part of tile installations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples:
1. Each color and finish of tile.
2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of tile.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer
and Installer.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
F. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each
mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or
producer.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section
from a single manufacturer for each product:
1. Joint sealants.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TILING 093000 - 2
2. Cementitious backer units.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from
contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating
from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,
composition, and color indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Refer to Interior Finish Specifications for product selections by Designer.
B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TILING 093000 - 3
C. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI
standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so
tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
match approved Samples.
E. Floor Tile: per Interior Specifications.
F. Wall Tile: per Interior Specifications.
G. Wall Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and
coursing where applicable.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope,
limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
B. Transition Strips: Aluminum, anodized finish.
1. Basis of Design: Schluter Systems L.P.
2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Laticrete, Inc.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added.
2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
C. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.
D. Waterproof Membrane: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch (0.203-mm)
nominal thickness.
1. Basis of Design Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.
E. Crack Isolation Membrane: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations and with
anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16-inch (4-mm) nominal thickness.
1. Basis of Design Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA.
F. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated.
1. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TILING 093000 - 4
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply
with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A,
and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended
for in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
a. Products:
1) Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
2) GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.
3) Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
4) Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.
2. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;
Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
a. Products:
1) Bostik; Chem-Calk 550.
2) Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245.
3) Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan.
4) Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials.
C. Metal Transition Strips: Schluter “Schiene” with clear aluminum finish.
D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color
or appearance of grout.
2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
1. Thickness: 1/2-inch.
2. Available Products:
a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.
b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
B. Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement.
b. James Hardie; Hardiebacker.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TILING 093000 - 5
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-
setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout
from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary
protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering
without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical
outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in
each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TILING 093000 - 6
1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
I. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for
providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
1. Tile floors in wet areas.
2. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as
abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be
exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
K. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet,
wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
L. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
M. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Tile: 1/8 inch.
2. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch.
N. Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's
written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer
that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
O. Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to
ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-
portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written
instructions.
P. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
Q. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions
to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Wood Subfloor:
1. Tile Installation TCNA F144; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer
board.
a. Tile Type: per Finish Schedule.
b. Thin-Set Mortar: Medium-bed, latex-portland cement mortar.
c. Grout: Polymer-modified grout.
3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Wall Installations, Metal/Wood Studs or Furring:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TILING 093000 - 7
1. Tile Installation W243: Thin-set mortar on water-resistant gypsum board; TCNA W243.
a. Tile Type: per Finish Schedule.
b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
c. Grout: Polymer-modified grout.
2. Tile Installation W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement
underlayment; TCNA W244.
a. Tile Type: per Finish Schedule.
b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
c. Grout: Polymer-modified grout.
3. Tile Installation W245: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer
board; TCNA W245.
a. Tile Type: per Finish Schedule.
b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
c. Grout: Polymer-modified grout.
END OF SECTION 093000
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 1
09 54 26 – LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Concealed suspension system for Linear Wood Ceiling Panels.
2. Linear Wood Ceiling Panels for concealed suspension system.
3. Trim and accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Division 1 – “General Conditions” for substitution requests, submittals, etc.
B. Division 9 – “Acoustic Ceilings.”
C. Division 13 – “Integrated Assemblies.”
D. Division 15 – “Mechanical” for work to be coordinated with ceiling.
E. Division 16 – “Electrical” for light fixture coordination.
F. Division 7 – “Thermal Insulation” for acoustical fiberglass installed behind system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 641: Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 1992.
B. ASTM C 423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by
the Reverberation Room Method; 1990.
C. ASTMC C 635: Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
D. ASTM C 636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 1992.
E. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1991.
F. ASTM E 580: Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 1991.
G. AWI (QSI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; 2003.
H. CISCA: Ceiling Systems Handbook.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers other than those listed in Paragraph 2.1 are required
to submit for approval prior to bidding per Section One.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer, approved by wood ceiling manufacturer,
who has completed panel ceilings similar in species, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Inspection: All work must pass inspection and approval of architect, as well as the local codes and
regulations or authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Wood Ceiling System: Obtain each type of Linear Wood Ceiling
Panels from a single fabricator, with in-house Shop Drawing capabilities, in-house assembly and
finishing capabilities, and with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties without delaying the project.
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from
a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying project.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 2
F. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
C. Samples: For verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size
indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets
showing the range of variations expected.
1. 12” x 18” samples of each panel type, pattern, and color.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS & COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings/Coordination Drawings for all ceilings, which should
include RCP and product details. Coordinate Linear Wood ceiling panels layout and installation of
wood panels and suspension system components with other construction elements that penetrates
ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system components, partition assemblies and all perimeter conditions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wood panel ceilings until spaces
are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery & Unloading: Coordinate crate sizes, weights, unloading options, and delivery schedule
with manufacturer prior to fabrication. Deliver wood panels and suspension system components to
Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other
mistreatment.
B. Acclimatization: Before installing wood panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content (at least 72 hours) per AWI standards.
C. Handling: Handle Linear Wood Ceiling Panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging
units in any way.
D. Protection:
1. Personnel: Follow good safety and industrial hygiene practices during handling and
installing of all products and systems, with personnel to take necessary precautions and
wear appropriate protective equipment as needed. Read related literature for important
information on products before installation. Contractor to be solely responsible for all
personal safety issues during and subsequent to installation; architect, specifier, owner,
and manufacturer will rely on contractor’s performance in such regard.
2. Existing completed work: Protect completed work above suspension system from damage
during installation of suspension system components.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS/WARRANTIES
A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 3
1. Linear Wood Ceiling Panels: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of
amount installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each component equal to 2.0
percent of amount installed.
B. Warranties: Provide owner with a (1) year warranty for material and workmanship on all installed
products.
1. Manufacturers: All materials, wood ceiling and grid, shall be warranted for (1) one year
for material and workmanship.
2. Installer: All work shall be warranted for (1) year from final acceptance of completed
work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 LINEAR WOOD PLANKS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. General: The following manufacturer is basis of design:
1. 9Wood Fast>Track (FT.9Wood.com).
B. Or equal, as prior approved by architect.
2.2 LINEAR WOOD CEILING PLANKS
A. Basis of Design: 9Wood 2000 Series Linear Wood, Tel. (888) 767-9990, sales@9wood.com
1. Wood Panels: 9Wood 2300 Continuous Linear
1) Species: Western Hemlock
2) Finish: Clear Finish
3) SKU: 2314-3
4) Member Size: 5/8” x 3-1/4 (net)
5) Members/LF: 3 Members per LF
6) Lengths: 8’ (nominal)
7) Fire Rating: Class C, as required by IBC T 803.11
8) Reveal Scrim: Black Acoustic Batts (furnished under 072100)
9) Return Trim: 5/8” x 3-1/4”
2. Delivery: 3-6 week lead-time, including approvals, with a guaranteed ship date.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal T-Grid Suspension System: Provide standard interior Metal Heavy Duty 15/16” suspension
T-Grid system using Main Runners, Cross-tees, Wall Angle or Shadow Moldings of types,
structural classifications, and black finishes indicated and that comply with applicable ASTM C
635 requirements. Comply with all applicable seismic codes and ordinances.
B. Attachment Devices: Size for 3 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct
Hung unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wire, Braces, Ties, Hanger Rods, Flat Hangers and Angle Hangers: Provide wires, rods and
hangers that comply with applicable ASTM specifications.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceilings attach or abut, with installer
present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect ceiling
installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 4
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
B. Layout: Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of Linear Wood Ceiling Panels to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans in accordance with wood
ceiling manufacturer’s approved Shop Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install 9Wood, Inc. Interior Panelized Linear, Style 2300 to comply with manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Attachments: Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members per manufacturer’s
instructions and in compliance with all local codes and regulations.
C. Installation of Metal T-Bar Grid: Install, align, brace, tie-off, mount, handle interferences, and
space suspension T-Grid in accordance with suspension manufacturer’s instructions and in
compliance with all local codes and regulations.
D. Installation of Panelized Linear Wood (Style 2300): Install Linear Wood ceiling panels in
accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and in compliance with all local codes
and regulations. Install with undamaged edges and fitted accurately to suspension system runners
and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit,
as required.
E. Suspension Runners: Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked
with one another. Install number and use on-center spacing per wood ceiling manufacturer’s
instructions, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings and in compliance with all local codes.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Clean exposed wood surfaces of 9Wood, Inc. Style 2300 Linear Wood Ceiling Panels.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace wood ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 54 26
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ACOUSTIC WOOD CEILINGS 094540 - 1
SECTION 095450 – ACOUSTIC WOOD CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Acoustic Plank Wood Members for concealed mounting to hat channels on structure.
2. Trim and accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Division 1 – “General Conditions” for substitution requests, submittals, etc.
B. Division 9 – “Acoustic Ceilings.”
C. Division 13 – “Integrated Assemblies.”
D. Division 15 – “Mechanical” for work to be coordinated with ceiling.
E. Division 16 – “Electrical” for light fixture coordination.
F. Division 7 – “Thermal Insulation” for acoustical fiberglass installed behind system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 641: Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 1992.
B. ASTM C 423: Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by
the Reverberation Room Method; 1990.
C. ASTMC C 635: Standard Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
D. ASTM C 636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 1992.
E. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
1991.
F. ASTM E 580: Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 1991.
G. AWI (QSI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; 2003.
H. CISCA: Ceiling Systems Handbook.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers other than those listed in Paragraph 2.1 are required
to submit for approval prior to bidding per Section One.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer, approved by wood ceiling manufacturer,
who has completed panel ceilings similar in species, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Inspection: All work must pass inspection and approval of architect, as well as the local codes and
regulations or authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Wood Ceiling System: Obtain each type of Acoustic Plank
Wood Members from a single fabricator, with in-house Shop Drawing capabilities, in-house
assembly and finishing capabilities, and with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying the project.
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from
a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying project.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ACOUSTIC WOOD CEILINGS 094540 - 2
F. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
C. Samples: For verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size
indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets
showing the range of variations expected.
1. 12” x 18” samples of each panel type, pattern, and color.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS & COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings/Coordination Drawings for all ceilings, which should
include RCP and product details. Coordinate Acoustic Plank Wood ceiling panels layout and
installation of wood panels and suspension system components with other construction elements
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system components, partition assemblies and all perimeter conditions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wood panel ceilings until spaces
are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery & Unloading: Coordinate crate sizes, weights, unloading options, and delivery schedule
with manufacturer prior to fabrication. Deliver wood panels and suspension system components to
Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other
mistreatment.
B. Acclimatization: Before installing wood panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content (at least 72 hours) per AWI standards.
C. Handling: Handle Acoustic Plank Wood Members carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging
units in any way.
D. Protection:
1. Personnel: Follow good safety and industrial hygiene practices during handling and
installing of all products and systems, with personnel to take necessary precautions and
wear appropriate protective equipment as needed. Read related literature for important
information on products before installation. Contractor to be solely responsible for all
personal safety issues during and subsequent to installation; architect, specifier, owner,
and manufacturer will rely on contractor’s performance in such regard.
2. Existing completed work: Protect completed work above suspension system from damage
during installation of suspension system components.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS/WARRANTIES
A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ACOUSTIC WOOD CEILINGS 094540 - 3
1. Acoustic Plank Wood Members: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of
amount installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each component equal to 2.0
percent of amount installed.
B. Warranties: Provide owner with a (1) year warranty for material and workmanship on all installed
products.
1. Manufacturers: All materials, wood ceiling and grid, shall be warranted for (1) one year
for material and workmanship.
2. Installer: All work shall be warranted for (1) year from final acceptance of completed
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTIC PLANK WOOD MEMBERS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. General: The following manufacturer is basis of design:
1. 9Wood, Inc. (www.9wood.com).
B. Or equal, as prior-approved by architect.
2.2 ACOUSTIC PLANK WOOD MEMBERS
A. Basis of Design: 9Wood, Inc. Acoustic Wood Series 3000
1. Wood Panels: 3100 Acoustic Plank
1) Species: Western Hemlock
2) Member Size: 7 9/16” x 8'-0"
3) Edge Profile: T&G Profile
4) Members/LF: 1.6 Members per LF
5) Assembly Style: T-Bar Z Clip (screwed to hat channel)
6) Fire Rating: Class C finish
7) Finish: Clear Interior Finish
8) Acoustic Backer: furnished under 072000.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceilings attach or abut, with installer
present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect ceiling
installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
B. Layout: Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of Acoustic Plank Wood Members to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans in accordance with wood
ceiling manufacturer’s approved Shop Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install 9Wood, Inc. Interior Acoustic Plank, Style 3100 to comply with manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ACOUSTIC WOOD CEILINGS 094540 - 4
B. Attachments: Suspend ceiling hangers from 7/8” hat channel fastened to underside of roof joists.
Install assembly to structural members per manufacturer’s instructions and in compliance with all
local codes and regulations.
C. Installation of Metal T-Bar Grid: Install, align, brace, tie-off, mount, handle interferences, and
space suspension T-Grid in accordance with suspension manufacturer’s instructions and in
compliance with all local codes and regulations.
D. Installation of Acoustic Plank (Style 3100): Install Wood Plank ceiling panels in accordance with
manufacturer’s installation instructions and in compliance with all local codes and regulations.
Install with undamaged edges and fitted accurately to suspension system runners and edge
moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit, as
required.
E. Suspension Runners: Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked
with one another. Install number and use on-center spacing per wood ceiling manufacturer’s
instructions, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings and in compliance with all local codes.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Clean exposed wood surfaces of 9Wood, Inc. Style 3100 Acoustic Plank Wood
Members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace wood ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and
repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 54 50
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE FLOORING AND SLABS 096340 - 1
SECTION 096340 - STONE FLOORING AND SLABS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes flagstone for interior flooring and seat slabs.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for porcelain or ceramic tile used as flooring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone and for each type of product indicated.
B. Samples:
1. For each new stone type indicated.
2. For each color of grout required.
C. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Build mockup of typical interior floor area about 96 inches square.
2. Build mockup of typical exterior pavement area about 96 inches square.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements for Interior Stone Flooring:
1. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below 50 deg F (10 deg C).
2. Maintain temperature at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above in installation areas during installation and
for 7 days after completion.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE FLOORING AND SLABS 096340 - 2
B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Exterior Stone Paving: Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements for Exterior Stone Paving: Comply with hot-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. Maintain temperature of materials and substrates below 100 deg F (38 deg C).
2. When the ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F (32 deg C), fog spray installed stone paving until
damp at least 3 times a day until paving is 3 days old.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLAGSTONE
A. Provide sound natural flagstone recycled from removed flagstone floor.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to
produce mortar color indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 1/4 inch, use aggregate graded with 100
percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other durable stone; of
color necessary to produce required mortar color.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use pigments
with a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon black.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bayer, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
c. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.
E. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging
water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland
cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik Findley Inc.
b. Laticrete International, Inc.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE FLOORING AND SLABS 096340 - 3
c. MAPEI Corp.
d. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company.
F. Water: Potable.
2.3 GROUT
A. Grout Colors: Match adjacent existing grout colors.
B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
C. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3 mm) and narrower.
2. Sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
D. Polymer Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik Findley Inc.
b. Laticrete International, Inc.
c. MAPEI Corp.
d. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Unsanded grout mix for joints 1/8 inch (3 mm) and narrower.
3. Sanded grout mix for joints wider than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bonsal.
b. Bonstone Materials Corporation.
c. Laticrete International, Inc.
d. MAPEI Corp.
B. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as
recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning
compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
C. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bostik Findley Inc.
b. Custom Building Products.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE FLOORING AND SLABS 096340 - 4
c. HMK Stone Care System.
d. Stonecare International.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions to produce
mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before
adding any water. Add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its
form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours.
Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar
within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
B. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and
latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions and to produce a stiff
mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone.
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex
additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Pointing Mortar: Comply with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including type and the
following:
1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce
color required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
2. Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored aggregates
with portland cement of selected color.
E. Joint Grout: Comply with mixing requirements in referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.6 STONE FABRICATION
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that
could impair structural integrity or function.
B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
1. Stone Edges: Square cut with top corner slightly eased to prevent snipping and as indicated on
drawings.
2. Joint Width: 1/16 inch minimum, 1/8 inch maximum, per Designer.
C. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural markings to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur.
2. Arrange units with veining as indicated on Drawings.
3. Arrange units in blend pattern.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE FLOORING AND SLABS 096340 - 5
D. Fabricate stone slab in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent
floor finishes.
E. Fabricate stone stair treads in sizes and profiles indicated. Cut grooves about 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by
1/16 inch (1.5 mm) deep in stair treads as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with
clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish field-cut edges to match
shop-cut edges.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone except for stone that is specified to have rough-
split edges.
B. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings.
C. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints of size specified or
indicated.
D. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to Drawings and Shop Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) or 1/4 of nominal
joint width, whichever is less.
B. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in
6 m), or 3/8 inch (10 mm) maximum from level or slope indicated.
C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) difference
between planes of adjacent units.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about
one hour before placing setting bed.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE FLOORING AND SLABS 096340 - 6
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even coating that completely
covers the concrete. Do not exceed 1/2-inch thickness. Limit area of mortar-bed bond coat to avoid its
drying out before placing setting bed.
C. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat. Spread, tamp, and screed to uniform
thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back,
bevel edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be placed.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed, apply
uniform 1/2-inch thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to
bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set of
mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or
adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as units are set.
H. Point joints after setting. Tool joints flat, uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
3.5 STONE SLAB INSTALLATION
A. At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone slab in same type of setting bed as abutting stone
flooring unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set slab in thin-set, latex-portland cement mortar to comply with ANSI A108.5 at locations where
mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above other adjacent paving and flooring.
B. At locations not adjacent to stone flooring, install stone slab in thin-set, latex-portland cement mortar to
comply with ANSI A108.5 or water-cleanable epoxy adhesive to comply with ANSI A108.4.
3.6 GROUTING
A. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.
2. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, taking care
not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces. After initial set of grout, finish joints by
tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free of drying cracks.
3. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days except as otherwise recommended
by manufacturer.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before
tooling joints.
B. Clean stonework after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures recommended by stone
fabricator for types of application.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STONE FLOORING AND SLABS 096340 - 7
C. Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
E. Protect installed stonework during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where adjoining areas
require construction work access, cover stonework with a minimum of 3/4-inch (20-mm) untreated
plywood over nonstaining kraft paper.
END OF SECTION 096340
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
COMPOSITE WOOD FLOORING 096400 - 1
SECTION 096400 – COMPOSITE WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-finished composite wood flooring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete,
masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry.
B. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm, ventilated, weathertight location.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous
through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation.
1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F (18 and
24 deg C) and relative humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring
during the conditioning period.
2. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later
than the beginning of the conditioning period.
a. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as,
space where it is to be installed.
b. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring
into spaces in which it will be installed.
B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building
occupants.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
COMPOSITE WOOD FLOORING 096400 - 2
C. Install factory-finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY-FINISHED WOOD FLOORING
A. Wood, Strip and Plank Flooring: HPVA EF.
1. Basis of Design: Kaswell Flooring Systems.
a. Product: Fibre Block II.
2. Selections per Architect/Interior Designer.
3. Finish: UV urethane system, color per Interior Designer.
4. Installation: adhesive.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers for application
indicated.
B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation
approved by wood flooring manufacturer.
C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation
Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
D. Transition Strips: Aluminum, anodized finish.
1. Basis of Design: Schluter Systems L.P.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. For adhesively applied wood flooring, verify that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale,
and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Substrate Moisture Testing, General: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer or, if none, comply
with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
1. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Concrete Substrates:
1. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8-inch (3-mm)
deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot (3-m) straight edge.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
COMPOSITE WOOD FLOORING 096400 - 3
a. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
2. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that are
incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using
mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning,
examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable
recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
B. Composite Wood Flooring: Set in adhesive over primed substrate per manufacturer requirements.
3.3 FIELD FINISHING
A. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be
noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish.
1. Comply with applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
B. Fill and repair wood flooring seams and defects.
C. Apply floor-finish materials in number of coats recommended by finish manufacturer for application
indicated, but not less than one coat of floor sealer and three finish coats.
1. Apply stains to achieve an even color distribution matching approved Samples.
2. For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to minimize
grain raise.
D. Cover wood flooring before finishing.
E. Do not cover wood flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after
applying last finish coat.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper
or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation.
1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft-paper-covered wood flooring. Protect
flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over
flooring.
END OF SECTION 096400
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1
SECTION 096513 – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient stair treads.
3. Resilient molding accessories.
B. Refer to Interior Finish Schedule for product selections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than
12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient
products.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Refer to Interior Finish Schedule for product selections.
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3. Style: Cove (base with toe) at hard surfaces. Straight at carpet.
4. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
5. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
6. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
2.2 RESILIENT STAIR TREADS
A. Refer to Interior Finish Schedule for product selections. Provide contrasting strip at front of tread.
B. Resilient Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3. Surface design: selected by Designer.
C. Nosing Style: Round.
D. Nosing Height: 1-1/2 inches.
E. Thickness: 1/4 inch and tapered to back edge.
F. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
G. Risers: Integral with tread.
H. Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover
stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for
installation with treads.
I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES
A. Description:
1. Carpet edge for glue-down applications
2. Nosing for carpet.
3. Nosing for resilient floor covering.
4. Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.
5. Joiner for tile and carpet.
6. Transition strips.
B. Material: Rubber.
C. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended
hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate
conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill
nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect
exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
E. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair tread
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do
not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.
(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact
with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Stair Accessories:
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units.
C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout
length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet, resilient floor covering, tile and wood floors
that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before
applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
C. Cover products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RUBBER TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1
SECTION 096519 – RUBBER TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes rubber floor tile.
B. See Finish Schedule for product selections by Designer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways,
enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
D. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor
tile.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RUBBER TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBER FLOOR TILE
A. Refer to Interior Finish Schedule.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
E. Size: per Finish Schedule.
F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Designer from full range of industry colors.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended
hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions
indicated.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do
not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and as follows.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.
(1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level
measurement.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RUBBER TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.
3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles
at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal
less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center
of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of
adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before
applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096519
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TACKABLE WALLCOVERING 097260
SECTION 09 72 60 - TACKABLE WALLCOVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient cork/linoleum tackable wallcovering.
2. Accessories.
B. Related Divisions:
1. Division 09 91 23 Interior Painting: Priming for wallcoverings.
2. Division 09 72 16.13 Flexible Vinyl Wallcoverings.
3. Division 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces: Tackboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Division 01 33 00.
B. Product data indicating compliance with specified requirements.
C. Installation Instructions.
D. Samples: 7 inch (18 centimeter) by 9 inch (23 centimeter) samples of each type of tackable
wallcovering material required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface Burning Characteristics Classification: Provide materials that meet classification ratings
below:
1. ASTM E84 (Flame Spread and Smoke Developed) II/B.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain tackable wallcovering system components from a single
source.
C. Deliver materials in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer, brand name, size, color,
and lot number.
D. Store materials in original, undamaged packaging inside a well-ventilated area protected from
weather, moisture, soiling, and extreme temperatures.
1. Maintain room temperature within the storage area at not less than
2. 68 degrees Fahrenheit (20 degrees Celsius) during the period materials are stored.
E. Mock-ups: Prepare mock-ups for architect's review and to establish requirements for seaming and
finish trim.
1. Correct areas, modify method of application/installation, or adjust finish texture as directed
by architect to comply with specified requirements.
2. Maintain mock-ups accessible to serve as a standard of quality.
3. Install sample panel of each type of wallcovering specified.
4. Install panels in areas designated by architect.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature within the building at not less than 68 degrees Fahrenheit (20 degrees
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TACKABLE WALLCOVERING 097260
Celsius) for a minimum of seventy-two hours prior to beginning of installation.
1. Do not install tackable wallcovering until the space is enclosed and weatherproof.
2. Do not install tackable wallcovering until temperature is stabilized and permanent lighting
is in place.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Instructions: Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods that may be
detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's limited five-year written warranty against manufacturing defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Basis of Design: Walltalkers® Tac-Wall®: Uni-color resilient homogeneous tackable linoleum
surface consisting of linseed oil, granulated cork, rosin binders, and dry pigments calendered onto
natural burlap backing. Color shall extend through thickness of material.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Solvent-free, SBR type linoleum adhesive (L-910W) or polyvinyl acetate dispersion type
(contact adhesive) when used in a press.
B. Color matched caulk: Designer select from manufacturer full options.
C. Colonial Tac-Wall Wood Trim: Provide wood trim in random lengths of 8 foot (244 centimeter) to
12 foot (366 centimeter). Select from manufacturer full options.
D. J-Trim for Tac-Wall: JT12-00: Clear satin, anodized aluminum, 1/4 inch (6 millimeter) trim (old:
JTRM-00).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions in which tackable wallcoverings will be installed.
1. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of tackable
wallcovering materials.
2. Wall surfaces to receive wallcovering materials shall be dry and free from dirt, grease,
loose paint, and scale.
3. Notify the contractor and architect in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the installation.
4. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove hardware, accessories, plates, and similar items to allow tackable
wallcovering to be installed.
1. Plaster surface: Remove surface chalk. In new work, use moisture meter to determine
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TACKABLE WALLCOVERING 097260
moisture content. Do not begin installation when moisture content is greater than five
percent.
2. Gypsum board surface: Recess nails and screws. Repair irregular tape joints, sand and
remove dust.
3. Painted surface: Remove loose paint or scale. Sand surface of enamel or gloss paint and
wipe clean with damp cloth.
4. Ensure wall surfaces scheduled to receive tackable wallcovering are properly sealed with a
quality primer specified for use under flexible vinyl wallcoverings.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
B. Cut sheets to size including a few inches of overage. Allow sheets to lay flat for at least twenty-four
hours prior to the application. Mark roll direction and sequence on the backside of each sheet. Hang
sheets in sequence as cut from the roll, do not reverse sheets.
C. Permanent HVAC system should be set to 68 degrees Fahrenheit (20 degrees Celsius) for at least
seventy-two hours prior to, during, and after the installation.
D. Back roll each sheet prior to the installation to release curl memory.
E. For seamed applications, using a seam and strip cutter remove the factory edge of one sheet. Using
the same tool, overlap and trace cut the mating edge of the second sheet. Repeat this step for as
many sheets as required for the job.
F. Scribe, cut, and fit material to butt tightly to adjacent surfaces, built-in casework, and permanent
fixtures and pipes.
G. Apply adhesive with a 1/16 inch square notch trowel to the area to receiving the sheet (apply enough
for one sheet at a time).
H. Work from top to bottom then side to side. Roll sheet firmly into adhesive for positive contact and
to remove air bubbles.
I. Remove adhesive residue immediately after each panel is hung with a mild soap/water solution and
a soft cloth/sponge.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean wallcovering using a sponge with a neutral pH cleaning solution. Do not use abrasive
cleaners. Rinse thoroughly with water and let dry before using.
B. It is important to remove adhesive while wet.
3.5 PROTECTION
Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION 097260
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS 098413 - 1
SECTION 098413 - WOOD FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cementitious wood fiber acoustic panels direct-attached to ceiling on furring strips.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing for furring channels.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C635 Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
2. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. ASTM E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
B. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA):
1. CISCA Code of Practices.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide acoustical ceiling assembly designed and tested to provide surface burning characteristics
(ASTM E84) as follows:
a. Flamespread: less than 25.
b. Smoke Developed: less than 450.
2. Provide acoustical ceiling system which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to
provide Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating as follows:
a. NRC: 1.0.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS 098413 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal
Procedures Section.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples: 6 inch × 6 inch (152 × 152 mm) sample for each
wood fiber ceiling unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work.
D. Shop drawings: Provide schematic layout of panel joints via submittal for Architect verification.
E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size
and complexity.
B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals:
1. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO):
a. ICBO Research Report No. 1116.
C. Pre-installation Meetings: Not required.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
1. Provide labels indicating brand name, style, size and thickness.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and
at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.
2. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not install ceiling panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.
2. Locate materials onsite at least 24 hours before beginning installation to allow materials to reach
temperature and moisture content equilibrium.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS 098413 - 3
3. Maintain the following conditions in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours
before, during and after installation:
a. Relative Humidity: 65 - 75%.
b. Uniform Temperature: 55 - 70 degrees F (13 - 21 degrees C).
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide 5 percent additional material for use by owner in building maintenance and
repair.
B. Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with appropriate labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Tectum Inc.
1. Tectum Bevel Direct Attachment Panels:
a. Material: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement.
b. Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
c. Colors:
1) Factory primed and field painted. Designer select color. Painting per Section
099123.
d. Size: as required to complete coverage with minimum joints. Provide layout of joints via
submittal for Architect verification.
1) Width: 23¾ inches (603 mm) or 47¾ inches (1213 mm), as required to complete
coverage with minimum joints.
2) Length: 2 feet - 8 feet (610 - 2438 mm),
e. Furring: 1 ½ inch furring strips.
f. Insulation: 2 inch batt insulation, compressed between panel and substrate.
1.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories as follows:
1. Tectum Painted Head Drywall Screws: square-pan washer-head screws.
a. Material: Steel.
b. Length: 2¼ inches (57 mm).
c. Color: White.
2. Tectum Touch-Up Paint: White.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS 098413 - 4
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the ceiling system manufacturer.
B. Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements and
industry standards applicable to work.
1. Comply with CISCA Code of Practices.
2.2 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for
unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.
2. Do not proceed with installation of ceiling system until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
2.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not begin installation until materials sufficient to complete an entire room are received and
prepared for installation.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite
edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders.
C. Attach furring strips to structure with 3 1/2 inch screws, penetrating into studs 1 1/2 inches, minimum.
D. Place insulation between panel and substrate. Attach panel to furring strip supports.
E. Supports to accept screws no greater than 24” o.c. Supports to run perpendicular to panel direction.
F. Panel ends must fall over support. Panel ends are to be staggered.
G. Screwed to supports, three screws per panel width for 23¾” panels and five screws per panel width for
47¾” panels.
H. Screw head to be flush with panel surface.
2.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, trim, edge moldings and suspension members to comply
with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
B. Touch up any minor finish damage.
C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate
evidence of damage.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD FIBER ACOUSTIC PANELS 098413 - 5
2.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and
humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the
time of acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 098413
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and selections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior
substrates:
1. Steel.
2. Galvanized metal.
3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
4. Gypsum board.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.
2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems
on interior substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set
quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint
system specified in Part 3.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,
based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of
topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.
B. Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17.
C. Bonding Primer (Solvent Based): MPI #69.
2.3 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
C. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.
D. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
E. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3
2.4 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).
2.5 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS
A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Flat): MPI #8 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. All substrates: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to
produce paint systems indicated.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other
trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 4
3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).
2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).
B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B.
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).
C. Aluminum Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.4H.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (gloss per Designer).
2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss per Designer).
END OF SECTION 099113
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and selections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior
substrates:
1. Steel.
2. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
3. Gypsum board.
4. Wood trim.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.
2. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this
Section.
3. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on exterior substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set
quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint
system specified in Part 3.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been
activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,
based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of
topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that
are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-
corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical
restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or
finishing shop:
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of
total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
2.3 METAL PRIMERS
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
2.4 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
2.5 LATEX PAINTS
A. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).
2.6 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and
primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to
produce paint systems indicated.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller
tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Pipe hangers and supports.
c. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
e. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other
paintable jacket material.
f. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5
E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other
trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Dressed Lumber Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss per Designer).
B. Steel Substrates:
1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).
C. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
D. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss per Designer).
END OF SECTION 099123
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 099300 - 1
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and selections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following
substrates:
1. Interior Substrates:
a. Architectural woodwork.
b. Wood doors not factory-finished.
c. Wood doors, cabinets and trim.
2. Exterior Substrates:
a. Wood beams.
b. Wood paneling and trim.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and application of standard paint
systems on exterior substrates.
2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and application of standard paint
systems on interior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI: Master Painters Institute.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated.
1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
2. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 099300 - 2
1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products
List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures
continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,
based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of
topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Primers, Stains, and Transparent Finishes: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 099300 - 3
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to
primers, stains, and transparent finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
8. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
C. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 WOOD FILLERS
A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.
2.3 PRIMERS AND SEALERS
A. Lacquer Sanding Sealer: MPI #84.
2.4 STAINS
A. Interior Wood Stain (Semitransparent): MPI #90.
2.5 POLYURETHANE FINISHES
A. Interior, Oil-Modified, Clear Urethane (Satin): MPI #57, Gloss Level 4.
B. Interior, Oil-Modified, Clear Urethane (Gloss): MPI #56, Gloss Level 6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an electronic
moisture meter.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes.
3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are
dry.
4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate and
conditions.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems
necessary during the period when finishes are being applied:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 099300 - 4
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample finish materials being used.
Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in
presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying finishes if test results show materials being used do
not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from
Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will
be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces if, on refinishing with
complying materials, the two finishes are incompatible.
3.3 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification
Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning,
repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished
wood surfaces.
3.4 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Finish Carpentry Substrates:
1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: MPI INT 6.3E.
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Three Finish Coats: Interior, oil-modified, clear urethane.
2. Polyurethane Varnish System: MPI INT 6.3K.
a. One Factory-Applied Finish Coat: Matching field-applied finish coats.
b. Two Field-Applied Finish Coats: Interior, oil-modified, clear urethane.
END OF SECTION 099300
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 1
SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Panel signs.
2. Room-identification signs.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and
accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size.
4. Show locations of electrical service connections.
5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and
ICC A117.1 for signs.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 SIGNS
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).
B. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces
with abrasion-resistant coating:
1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. (854 J/m) per ASTM D 256, Method A.
2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. (62 MPa) per ASTM D 638.
3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. (2345 MPa) per ASTM D 790.
4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F (129 deg C) at 264 lbf/sq. in. (1.82 MPa) per ASTM D 648.
5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser
with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044.
2.4 PANEL SIGNS
A. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed
conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to
corner, complying with the following requirements:
1. Laminated, Polycarbonate-Faced Sheet: 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick, polycarbonate face sheet
laminated to each side of 0.197-inch- (5.0-mm) thick phenolic backing.
2. Acrylic Sheet: 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) thick.
3. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) thick.
4. Phenolic-Backed Photopolymer Sheet: Provide light-sensitive, water-wash photopolymer face
layer bonded to a phenolic base layer to produce a composite sheet with overall, face layer, and
base-layer thicknesses, respectively, of 0.160, 0.040, and 0.120 inch (4.06, 1.0, and 3.04 mm).
5. Laminated Sheet: High-pressure engraved stock with contrasting color face laminated to acrylic
core as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
6. Edge Condition: Square cut.
7. Corner Condition: Square.
8. Mounting: As indicated.
a. Wall mounted with concealed anchors.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 3
b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.
9. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
10. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with
contrasting colors.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal, stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized devices
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.
4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign
material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign
material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head
indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.
C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with
adhesive on both sides.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water
penetration and retention.
2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side.
Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.
4. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.
5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing
work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed
fasteners that match sign finish.
B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel surface
indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.
1. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard baked enamel.
2. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard enamel.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 4
3. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Apply manufacturer's standard opaque background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet.
4. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose
contrasting core ply.
C. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce
precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.
D. Subsurface-Engraved Graphics: Reverse engrave back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting
copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color
coating over enamel-filled copy.
E. Shop- and Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface. Firmly press
film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths.
F. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction
and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required.
1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to match
sign-background color color unless otherwise indicated.
2. Stainless-Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets to match sign background finish unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces
free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would
impair installation.
4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign.
Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced
adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and
nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign.
Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 5
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced
adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched
between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in
position until adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers
pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting
through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink
holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and
tighten.
4. Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in
position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.
5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply
linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support
weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive
extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in
position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully
sets.
6. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris.
Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign
without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in
position, and push to engage tape adhesive.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
END OF SECTION 101423
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1
SECTION 102800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories for public bathrooms.
B. Refer to Schedules for products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles,
fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified.
B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation
instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
C. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide
lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units
exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUBLIC-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
1. Products: refer to Drawings.
2.2 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-233x24.
2. Description: Utility shelf with mop/broom holders and rag hooks.
3. Length: 24 inches.
4. Hooks: Three.
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2
b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum
nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
E. Tempered Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with
silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.
F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant
when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as
approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to
view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate
indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and
joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge.
Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction,
without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide
anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant
installation, as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold
mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide
minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or
screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly.
Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 102800
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1
SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Semi-recessed fire protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers and hoses as required.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 10 Section "Signage" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire extinguishers and
cabinets.
2. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style,
and panel style.
2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.
D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire
extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated
are accommodated.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 2
B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose valves, and
hose racks indicated are accommodated.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.5 SEQUENCING
A. Apply decals on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for
fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1
(clear).
2.3 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following manufacturers:
a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
c. Potter Roemer LLC.
d. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C. Cabinet Material: Steel.
1. Finish: White baked enamel.
2. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 3
surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of
insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet
installation.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Prime-painted steel.
1. Size: 1 ½”
F. Door Material: Prime-painted steel.
G. Door Style: Manufacturer standard.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim
style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180
degrees.
J. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire
protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with
plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into
face.
3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
K. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer's standard powder-coat for the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet door and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another
finish.
b. Interior of cabinet and door.
c. Color: Designer select from Manufacturer full range.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware
to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and
coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13
mm) thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 4
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and
are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, racks and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections
before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended
by manufacturer.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 5
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and
mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
1. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type 1-A: 10-B-C portable fire extinguishers and mounting brackets.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting
brackets.
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection
cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire
extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket
indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
d. Potter Roemer LLC.
2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and
bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
B. Wet-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, 2.5-gal. (9.5-L) nominal capacity, with potassium acetate-
based chemical in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 5 lb. nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in stainless-steel container.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or
black baked-enamel finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
c. Potter Roemer LLC.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and
location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter
decals applied to mounting surface.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.
END OF SECTION 104416
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR METAL TRELLIS 107313 - 1
SECTION 107313 – EXTERIOR METAL TRELLIS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed metal trellis with exposed structure with weathering steel finish.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Refer to Section 055000 for metal canopy framing and anchoring material requirements.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, fabricate, and install canopies to withstand loads from gravity, wind, snow, drift, and structural
movement, including thermally induced movement; and to resist, without failure, other conditions of in-
service use, including exposure to weather.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, tearing of roofing, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of canopy indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and operational
clearances. Show colors and graphic layout and content.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2. Show text message, font, character sizes, and other graphic forms, character spacing, word
spacing, line spacing, margin widths, position of copy, and other information related to graphic
design.
C. Samples: For each colored or finished canopy component.
D. Maintenance data.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR METAL TRELLIS 107313 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing canopies and providing professional
engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--
Steel" or AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and fabricator agree to repair or
replace components of canopies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including framework.
b. Deterioration of roofing including seam failure.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Canopy Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CANOPY FRAMES
A. Steel Frames:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as required by structural loads.
3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless another weight is indicated
or required by structural loads.
4. Steel Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing
complying with ASTM A 513 or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500.
5. Steel Finish: A606 weathering steel finish.
B. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, Hardware, and Installation Accessories: Complying with performance
requirements indicated and suitable for exposure conditions, supporting structure, anchoring substrates,
and installation methods indicated. Corrosion-resistant or noncorrodible units; weather-resistant,
compatible, nonstaining materials. Provide as required for canopy assembly, mounting, and secure
attachment. Number as needed to comply with performance requirements and to maximize appearance;
evenly spaced. Where exposed to view, with finish and color as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.2 CANOPY FABRICATION
A. Frames: Preassemble canopy frames in the shop to greatest extent possible.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR METAL TRELLIS 107313 - 3
1. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where
possible. Fabricate slip-fit connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
4. Weld corners and connections continuously. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove
welding flux immediately. At exposed corners and connections, finish exposed welds and
surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches that of adjacent surface.
5. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications in place and to properly transfer loads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install canopies at locations and in position indicated, securely connected to supports, free of
rack, and in proper relation to adjacent construction. Use mounting methods of types described and in
compliance with Shop Drawings and fabricator's written instructions.
B. Install canopies after other finishing operations, including joint sealing and painting, have been
completed.
C. Slip fit frame connections accurately together to form hairline joints and tighten to secure.
D. Weld frame connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of
shipping size limitations.
1. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
E. Anchoring to In-Place Construction: Use anchors, fasteners, fittings, hardware, and installation
accessories where necessary for securing canopies to structural support and for properly transferring load
to in-place construction.
F. Coordinate canopy installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed
in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall and
roof assemblies.
G. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, connections, and abraded areas. Paint
uncoated and abraded areas with same or compatible material as used for shop-applied finish painting.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
EXTERIOR METAL TRELLIS 107313 - 4
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain canopys. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 107313
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 1
SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following items:
1. Dishwashers.
2. Refrigerator/freezer.
3. Microwave with vent hood.
4. Oven/range.
B. Provide ADA-height accessible appliances.
C. Product selections per Equipment Schedule.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for custom-made cabinets and plastic-
laminate tops that receive residential appliances.
2. Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" for pre-fabricated cabinets that receive residential
appliances.
3. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water distribution piping connections to
residential appliances.
4. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks, waste disposers, and instant hot-water
dispensers.
5. Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for services and
connections to residential appliances.
6. See Division 21, 22, and 23 Sections for supply and exhaust fans; exhaust ductwork; service
roughing-ins; drain traps; atmospheric vents; valves, pipes, and fittings; fire-extinguishing
systems; and other materials required to complete foodservice equipment installation.
7. See Division 26 Sections for connections to fire-alarm systems, wiring, disconnect switches, and
other electrical materials required to complete foodservice equipment installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed finish.
C. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation
and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance required.
2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for product's
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one
another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service
performance.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:
1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are
listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
3. ANSI: Provide gas-burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards.
4. NAECA: Provide residential appliances that comply with NAECA standards.
F. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with
accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG)."
1. Operable Parts: Provide controls with forward reach no higher than 48 inches (1219 mm) above
the floor, horizontal front reach no more than 25 inches (635 mm), horizontal side reach no more
than 24 inches (610 mm), and that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist
and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide 50 percent of freezer space within 54 inches (1370 mm) of the
floor.
G. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards:
1. Household Refrigerators: AHAM HRF-1.
H. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance Labeling
Rule.
1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 3
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified
agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed refrigeration
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
A. ADA compliant and Energy-Star® rated appliances as follows:
B. Manufacturers:
1. Maytag.
2. Whirlpool.
3. Frigidaire.
4. General Electric Co.
C. Schedule of Appliances: refer to Equipment Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely
concealed.
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area.
Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 22 and 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 4
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.
B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for
operation.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain residential appliances. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 113100
A4 ARCHITECTS B AR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C ARBONDALE, COLORADO
STAINLESS STEEL CASEWORK 114010 - 1
SECTION 114010 – STAINLESS STEEL CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stainless steel counters and casework.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions,
fabrication details, utility service requirements, and attachments to other work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification Mark
certifying compliance with applicable NSF/ANSI standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, with No. 4 finish (directional satin finish) on exposed surfaces.
2.2 STAINLESS STEEL CASEWORK
A. Stainless Steel Tops: Made from 0.0625-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 666, Type 304, with
No. 4 satin finish.
1. Weld shop-made joints, and grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional, textured,
polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and
rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2. Sound deaden entire undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating.
3. Extend top down to provide a 1-inch thickness and a 1/2-inch return flange under frame.
4. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface.
a. Height: 4-inches.
5. Provide raised marine edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch two ways to sink to
provide drainage without channeling or grooving.
B. Stainless-Steel Casework:
1. Sides, Ends, Fixed Backs, Bottoms, Cabinet Tops, Soffits, and Items Not Otherwise Indicated:
0.050 inch (1.27). Bottoms may be 0.038 inch (0.95 mm) if reinforced.
A4 ARCHITECTS B AR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C ARBONDALE, COLORADO
STAINLESS STEEL CASEWORK 114010 - 2
2. Back Panels, Doors, Drawer Fronts and Bodies, and Shelves: 0.038 inch (0.95 mm) except 0.050
inch (1.27 mm) for unreinforced shelves more than 36 inches (900 mm) long.
3. Intermediate Horizontal Rails, Center Posts, Tubular Legs, and Top Gussets: 0.062 inch (1.59
mm).
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Installation Accessories, General: NSF certified for end-use application indicated.
B. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S (single component), Grade NS (nonsag), Class 25,
Use NT (nontraffic) related to exposure, and Use M, G, A, or O as applicable to joint substrates indicated.
1. Public Health and Safety Requirements:
a. Sealant is certified for compliance with NSF standards for end-use application indicated.
2. Cylindrical Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C, closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger
than joint width.
2.1 CABINET FABRICATION
A. General: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for interchangeability of
like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision jigs to provide units that are
square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Integrally frame and weld to form a dirt and
vermin-resistant enclosure. Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32
inch (1.5 to 2.4 mm).
B. Metal Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel
reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening material.
C. Metal Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with no raw metal
edges at top.
D. Metal Shelves: Front, back, and ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at front and back to
form reinforcing channels. Provide clips or other means to support shelves and allow height of shelves to
be adjusted in increments of not more than 2 inches (50 mm).
E. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated
equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged
edges.
F. Trim Flanges: Formed metal trim fabricated from same material and with same finish as cabinets.
Provide at perimeter of recessed cabinets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK
A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other
finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
A4 ARCHITECTS B AR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS C ARBONDALE, COLORADO
STAINLESS STEEL CASEWORK 114010 - 3
B. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions with
fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush,
tight, and uniform.
C. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
D. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly without warp or bind
and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush joints and with internal supports placed to prevent
deflection. Locate joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.
B. Field-Made Joints: Provide welded joints in tops. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform,
directionally textured finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse
surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
C. Field-Made Joints: Provide tight-fitting joints in tops using adhesives and fasteners recommended by
manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is
not required.
D. Fastening: Secure countertops to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more
fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.
E. Provide chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound for closures at junctures of top, curb,
and splash with walls as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition.
C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain foodservice equipment.
END OF SECTION 114010
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1
SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes roller shades for interior mounting on windows with manual operation.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and locations.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades
and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction
details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and
dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other work,
operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of shade indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each type of roller
shade indicated.
2. For the following products:
a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches (76 mm) square, with specified treatments applied.
Mark face of material.
b. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- (300-mm-) square section of fabric, from dye lot
used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark
top and face of material.
c. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long.
E. Window Treatment Schedule: For roller shades. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.
G. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 2
1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes,
and performance.
3. Operating hardware.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Comply with WCMA A 100.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROLLER SHADES
A. Locations: per Designer.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Draper Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas, Inc.; Hunter Douglas Window Fashions Division.
3. Lu-Tek, Inc.
4. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
5. Sol-R-Veil.
C. Shade Band Material: PVC-coated fiberglass.
1. Product: per Designer.
2. Fabric: Selection per Designer.
3. Colors: per Designer.
4. Material Openness Factor: 5 percent.
5. Material UV Blockage: 100 percent.
D. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall
thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of
shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets. Provide
capacity for one roller shade band(s) per roller.
E. Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
F. Mounting Brackets: Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel finished to match fascia or headbox.
G. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous
panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators;
removable design for access.
H. Bottom Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide concealed, by
pocket of shade material, internal-type.
I. Mounting: Inside.
J. Shade Operation: Manual operator.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 3
2.2 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74
deg F (23 deg C):
1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) from
face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed.
2. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between
shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations
between openings.
B. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting fascia or
headbox roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.
C. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to
shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and
supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass.
Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction
throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of
Substantial Completion.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 4
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 01 Section Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 122413
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD COUNTERTOPS 123619 - 1
SECTION 123619 - WOOD COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood countertops.
2. Shop finishing of wood countertops.
B. Refer to Section 064113 for combi-core countertops installed with wood casework.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished
woodwork.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates or
WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.
1.4 SUSTAINABLE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. NGBS Requirement 901.4: Non-emitting finished productS.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or Licensee of WI's
Certified Compliance Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood countertops until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD COUNTERTOPS 123619 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for
grades indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide labels from certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of
grades specified.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Type of Top: Solid wide width for transparent finish. Solid wood, edge glued, with crown direction reversed
in adjacent boards, to produce widths indicated. Select boards for similarity of color and grain and arrange
boards for optimum match between adjacent boards.
1. Wood Species and Cut:
a. Species: Designer select.
b. Cut: Designer select.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Installation Adhesive:
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
2. Edges of Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams
to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
WOOD COUNTERTOPS 123619 - 3
2.5 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish architectural wood countertops at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only
final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as
applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces
of wood countertops. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. Food grade finish.
3. Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane. Food grade finish.
4. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain
wood before staining and finishing.
5. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
6. Sheen: Match Architect sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install wood countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut wood countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into
underside of countertop.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls
with adhesive.
3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
END OF SECTION 123619
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS AND SURROUNDS 123661 - 1
SECTION 123661 – SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Refer to Finish Schedule for products and selections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Quartz countertops.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of
joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: Architect select from manufacturer full options.
2. Backsplash: Architect select from manufacturer full options.
3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
B. Countertops: 1/2-inch-3/4-inch thick, simulated stone with front edge built up with same material.
C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-3/4-inch thick, simulated stone.
2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.
B. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled
plastic resin and complying with the "Physical Characteristics of Materials" Article of ANSI SS1.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS AND SURROUNDS 123661 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Align
adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean
entire surface.
B. Fasten surrounds with adhesive, applied directly to wall. Caulk seams with silicone.
END OF SECTION 123661
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ENTRANCE FLOOR TILES 124813 - 1
SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR TILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Carpet tiles adhered to concrete floor at building entrance.
B. Refer to Interior Finish Schedule for product selections and locations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including the following:
a. Door control devices.
2. Divisions between mat sections.
3. Perimeter floor moldings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated.
E. Maintenance Data: For floor mats to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG),” and Sections 302 and 303 in ICC A117.1.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ENTRANCE FLOOR TILES 124813 - 2
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive floor mats.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Entrance Tiles: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each size, color, and pattern
indicated, but no fewer than 5 units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE TILES
A. Carpet-Type Tiles: Carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch- (3- to 6-mm-) thick, flexible vinyl backing to form
mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch (9.5 or 11 mm) thick with nonraveling edges.
1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Tile Size: To fit entrance.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation
provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that
may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing
bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ENTRANCE FLOOR TILES 124813 - 3
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile
installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8
inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent
requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended
in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough
sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides,
immediately before applying adhesive.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.
C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet
tile manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,
alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating
on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
ENTRANCE FLOOR TILES 124813 - 4
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing
by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 124813
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 1
SECTION 142400 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Holeless hydraulic machine-roomless (MRL) passenger elevator.
2. Hydraulic service elevator.
3. Elevator smoke containment system, if required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar
information.
B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each
landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction,
and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum
dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average
power demands.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine
room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are
adequate for elevator system being provided.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having
jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair,
restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 2
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance
service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR
A. Basis of Design: ThyssenKrupp 2500 MRL.
1. FPM: 150 fps.
2. Capacity: 2500 lb.
3. Stops: Two.
4. Size: Standard cab.
5. Door: 3’-0” by 7’-0”.
6. Machine Room: None.
B. Accessories/Additional Features:
1. Wall protection pads and mounting.
2. Resilient flooring protection mat.
3. Cable connection to building access control.
4. Cable connection for card reader rough-in at control panel.
5. Cab protection kit for remodeling activities: Foam insulation and plywood.
C. Smoke Containment System:
1. SmokeGuard Model 200 Elevator Containment System.
D. Finishes:
1. Stainless steel elevator door and front.
2. Manufacturer standard stainless steel panel ceiling with recessed down-lights
3. Flooring to accommodate thin-set stone tile.
4. Manufacturer standard stainless steel railing at rear wall.
5. Side and rear wall panels to have custom laminate finishes.
2.2 VERTICAL RECIPROCATING LIFT
A. Basis of Design: PFlow Industries Hydraulic D Series.
1. Selections per Architect and Owner.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 3
2.3 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems, including standard components published by
manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete
system.
B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and
full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following:
1. Pump mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime-painted steel
enclosure lined with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation board.
2. Submersible pump, suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts.
3. Provide motor with wye-delta or solid-state starting.
C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-
proof housing at pump unit.
D. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily biodegradable, fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with
antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by
elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil
Division, Inc.
E. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size
to provide not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance from cylinder and extending above pit floor. Provide
means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with ASME A17.1.
F. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or polymer-coated, nonlubricated guides.
2.4 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator as required
to provide type of operation system indicated.
B. Single-Car Auxiliary Operations:
1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a designated floor
and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either for
return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at main lobby or fire
command station.
2. Battery-Powered Lowering: When power fails, car is lowered to the lowest floor, opens its doors,
and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.
2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-
controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light
beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, a loud
buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 4
2.6 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
G. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or HGL.
2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General Finish Requirements: Architect select from Manufacturer finish selections.
B. Passenger Elevator: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with car roof,
access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.
1. Wall and Door Panels: Designer select.
2. Ceiling: Designer select.
3. Door Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
4. Pad Hooks: stainless steel.
C. General:
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by
ASME A17.1.
2. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances
complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories.
1. Provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections in walls where required.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
2. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been
fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other permanent,
nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 5
B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control stations. Mount in return panel
adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide submittals of non-proprietary car controls for Architect review and selection.
C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials
preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station.
System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that
indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is
contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power
supply.
D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide telephone jack in each car and
required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service
specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or
above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping
at or passing each of the floors served.
1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.
F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated.
G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows.
1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.
2. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame[ for each elevator].
H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of
travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and
graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in
place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder
guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides.
B. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
C. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 142400 - 6
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary
or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and
by governing regulations and agencies.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to Service Elevator. Comply with the
following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes:
1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to
protect finishes from damage.
2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect
elevator and elevator equipment.
3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service.
4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction.
Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish
entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 142400
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
VERTICAL RECIPROCATING CONVEYOR 14 46 00 - 1
SECTION 14 46 00 - VERTICAL RECIPROCATING CONVEYOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design, fabrication, and installation of one (1) vertical reciprocating conveyor (VRC) including drive
unit, controls, gates, and enclosures as shown on project drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00: Cast in place concrete as applicable.
B. Section 03 80 00: Concrete cutting as applicable
C. Sections of Division 26: Electrical as applicable.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME B20.1).
B. AWS – American Welding Society.
C. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit latest edition of VRC data sheet and outline drawing with the proposal.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit General Arrangement Drawing for approval within 3 weeks of receipt of an order,
including plans, elevations, sections of the VRC, base plate and lateral loading values, and
recommended pit dimensions if applicable.
2. Submit VRC Specification Sheet for approval within three weeks of receipt of an order, including
scope of work, operating and control voltages, lift speed, type of paint, and any special project
notes.
C. Closeout Submittals provided with equipment:
1. Electrical Schematic Drawing including control panel layout and Bill of Materials reflecting
original manufactured part numbers.
2. Installation Manual and Electrical Installation Guide.
3. Owner’s Manual including spare parts list, exploded parts drawings, operating instructions,
maintenance schedule, service and troubleshooting guidelines.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer must have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the manufacture of vertical
reciprocating conveyors.
B. All structural welding performed by manufacturer must be done by welders certified to AWSD.1.1.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
VERTICAL RECIPROCATING CONVEYOR 14 46 00 - 2
C. Manufacturer must guarantee compliance with ASME B20.1 Safety Standard for Conveyors and
Related Equipment. Manufacturer further guarantees to repurchase the equipment at full purchase
price in the event that Owner is unable to use the equipment due to lack of elevator code compliance.
D. Installer shall have the approval of the manufacturer and have a minimum of five (5) years experience
in the installation of vertical reciprocating conveyors.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant the VRC free of manufacturing defects beginning (30) days after
shipment with the following minimums:
1. Structure – lifetime parts and labor
2. Manufactured components – one (1) year parts and labor.
3. Purchased components – one (1) year parts, ninety (90) days labor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Series D VRC manufactured by PFlow Industries, Inc.,
Address: 6720 N. Teutonia Ave, Milwaukee, WI 53209
Phone (414) 333-2887 e-mail kc@pflow.com website: www.pflow.com
2.02 VRC MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
A. Capacity: The VRC shall be rated at a live load capacity of 1000 lbs.
B. Speed: The VRC shall have a lifting speed of 17 feet per minute when loaded to capacity.
C. Vertical Travel: The VRC shall have a maximum lift height of 9 feet with a total of 2 operating levels.
D. Lift Platform: The VRC platform shall be a minimum of 3’6” wide x 3’4” inches long x 84” load
height with a steel deck plate and minimum 48” high welded handrails and kickplates on non-
operating ends and safety chains with snap hooks on operating ends. Ninety-degree carriage
configuration. Braided hoses to penetrate shaft-way wall.
E. Support Columns: The VRC shall have a minimum of two (2) 6” wide, roll formed or wide flange
support columns.
F. Deflection Under Load: When loaded to rated capacity, no portion of the VRC shall exhibit
permanent deformations.
G. Hydraulic Power Unit:
1. A pressure compensated flow control valve shall be included to provide for safe lowering of the
load.
2. A velocity sensing check valve is required to prevent uncontrolled carriage descent in case of a
failure in the hydraulic pressure line.
3. A pressure relief valve shall be provided to protect the hydraulic system from excessive pressure
due to overloading or jam situations.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
VERTICAL RECIPROCATING CONVEYOR 14 46 00 - 3
H. Lifting Means:
1. Raising and lowering of the carriage shall be provided by dual 2” ram direct-acting hydraulic
cylinders. Sheaves, wire ropes, or chains are not to be incorporated in the lifting means.
2. An adjustable mechanical stop and pressure switch act to limit the upward travel of the lift
platform to a height flush and level with the upper floor. The pressure switch shall be designed
and set to allow full build up of hydraulic pressure to secure the lift platform in place and prevent
bounce during loading or unloading.
I. Safety Enclosure: Guarding on all non-operating sides of the VRC shall be by safety enclosures a
minimum of 8’ high consisting of material which will reject a ball 1/2” in diameter.
J. Floor Level Gates: Gates are required on all operating sides of the VRC at each level of operation.
1. The gates shall be single swing type.
2. Each gate must be equipped with an electro-mechanical interlock to prevent opening of the gate
unless the carriage is present, and to prevent operation of the VRC unless all gates are closed.
K. Signs: “NO RIDER” signs shall be provided. Lettering shall be a minimum of 2” high for visibility.
L. Approach Ramp: The manufacturer shall supply a steel fabricated approach ramp to be installed
within 1” of the VRC platform at the ground level.
2.03 VRC ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
A. Motor:
1. Motor horsepower shall be sized for the rated live load and specified speed.
2. All motors are three phase and shall be designed for continuous duty at ambient temperatures
from 32° to 102° Fahrenheit.
B. Controls:
1. Each operating floor level shall be equipped with a momentary contact push button control station
with call, send, and mushroom style E-stop operators for manual control of lift operation.
2. An internally pre-wired main control panel shall be provided with step-down transformer and
field wiring terminal block.
3. The motor/pump unit shall be pre-wired to the main control panel.
4. Provide quick-connect type cables and connectors for field connection of push button control
stations and gate interlocks to the main control panel.
C. Power Source: Owner shall terminate high voltage operating power within 10’ of the location
designated for installation of the VRC.
2.04 FINISHES
A. All carbon steel surfaces shall be coated with an industrial enamel finish over primer – color PFlow
Blue.
B. Prior to painting, all dirt, mill scale, oil, and grease shall be removed from carbon steel surfaces by a
combination of brushing, wiping, and use of solvents.
A4 ARCHITECTS BAR FORK RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CARBONDALE, COLORADO
VERTICAL RECIPROCATING CONVEYOR 14 46 00 - 4
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing installation of the VRC, the installer shall visually examine the conditions under
which the VRC is to be installed and notify the architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install the VRC, enclosures, and gates as indicated on the approved shop drawing.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions when installing the equipment.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Upon completion of installation, the VRC shall be inspected to verify that it meets all
requirements of PARTS 1, 2, and 3 of this Section.
B. Tests:
1. Operating Load Test: The owner will provide a 1000 pound test load and load the VRC at the
ground level. The loaded VRC platform shall be conveyed to an upper floor level and returned to
the ground level to assure proper operation. If the VRC conveyor cannot lift or lower the load, the
VRC shall fail the test.
2. Performance Test: This Test is to be performed in conjunction with Test 1 above. During the
demonstration of the lifting and lowering test, the owner shall measure the time required to lift and
lower the capacity load. The owner will average times for lifting and lowering the load and
calculate the average lifting and lowering speed. If the VRC does not lift the load within 10% of
the specified speed, or if the lowering speed exceeds the lifting speed by more than 10%, the VRC
shall fail the test.
3. Stationary Load Test: This Test is to be performed in conjunction with Test 1 above. The loaded
VRC platform shall remain stationary at an upper level for a minimum of one (1) hour. After the
one (1) hour period, the VRC will be inspected for deflection of the components or drift of the
platform. If deformation or downward drift is evident, the VRC shall fail the test.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANUP
A. Touch up all scratches, abrasions, and other defects in the pre-finished surfaces with the same
material color as that used in the factory applied finish.
B. Remove and dispose of all rubbish and debris caused by the work under this section.
C. Verify that equipment is properly installed and guarded per ASME B20.1
END OF SECTION 144600